Sie sind auf Seite 1von 891

INTECONT PLUS

Operating Instructions

DE Bedienungshinweise Bandwaage
GB Operating instructions Belt Weigher
FR Instructions de service Bascule Intgratice
IT Istruzioni per luso Bilancia per nastro
ES Instrucciones de uso Bscula de cinta
NL Bedieningsinstructie Bandweger
SE Manverhnvisningar Bandvg
RU K
CS Vaga za traku Uputstva za upravljanje
HU Kezelsi tmutat Szlltszalag-mrleg
CZ Nvod k obsluze Psov vha
BG

BV-H2007AA
Service Service
Qualitt und Zuverlssigkeit sind die Grundlagen der Schenck Process Quality and reliability form the basis for Schenck Process corporate
Unternehmensphilosophie, weltweit. Deshalb bieten wir Ihnen ein philosophy all over the world. Thats why we offer you an extensive
umfangreiches Service-Konzept, von der strengen Qualittskontrolle service strategy starting with our stringent quality control through
ber die Montage und Inbetriebnahme bis hin zur lckenlosen assembly and commissioning right down to all-round support.
Betreuung an. Wir sind jederzeit fr Sie da! Were always there for you.

Helpdesk - kostenfrei Free Helpdesk


(Mo. - Fr., mindestens (Monday through Friday from at least
8.00 17.00 Uhr MEZ) 8 oclock to 5 p.m. CET)
Whrend unserer normalen Brozeiten stehen Ihnen in jedem Service specialists are available to you in every department during
Geschftsbereich Service-Spezialisten zur Problemfall- / our normal office hours for analying problems and malfunctions.
Strfallanalyse zur Verfgung.
Heavy Industry Vibrating & Screening Technology
Building materials, mining, foundry, steel and cement T +49 61 51 - 1531 35 25
T +49 61 51 - 32 31 38 F +49 61 51 - 1531 30 96
F +49 61 51 - 32 32 70 vibrating@schenckprocess.com
heavy@schenckprocess.com
Light Industry Spare Parts & Components
Chemistry, plastics, foodstuffs and pharmaceuticals T +49 61 51 - 1531 17 58
T +49 61 51 - 1531 25 72 F +49 61 51 - 1531 36 32
F +49 61 51 - 1531-26 68 spares@schenckprocess.com
light@schenckprocess.com components@schenckprocess.com
Transport Automation
All industries with logistics processes and trains
T +49 61 51 - 1531 24 48
F +49 61 51 - 1531 13 69
transport@schenckprocess.com
Individuelles Telefon Consulting kostenpflichtig Individual phone consulting (fee required)
(Mo. - Fr., mindestens (Monday through Friday from at least 8 oclock to 5 p.m. CET)
8.00 17.00 Uhr MEZ)
Sie wnschen eine Inbetriebnahme mit telefonischer Untersttzung Do you want one of our service specialists to give you phone
eines Service-Spezialisten oder eine Online-Diagnose / Optimierung support in commissioning your system or on-line diagnosis /
Ihres Systems? Wir sind fr Sie da. Planen Sie mit uns Ihren system optimisation? Were there for you. Schedule an
Wunschtermin. appointment with us whenever you need it.
Kundenservice 24h Notfall-Hotline kostenfrei Free 24 h Customer Service Hotline
Sie haben einen Str- / Problemfall auerhalb unserer normalen You have a malfunction or problem outside of our normal business
Arbeitszeiten. Kein Problem, Sie knnen auch auerhalb unserer hours. No problem. You can reach a Schenck service technician at
Brozeiten jederzeit einen Schenck-Servicemitarbeiter zur Problem- / any time outside of our office hours for recording problems or
Strfallannahme, Service-Disposition und Ersten Hilfe erreichen. malfunctions, service scheduling and first aid.

24h Notfall-Hotline: 24h Emergency-Hotline :


+49 172 650 17 00 +49 172 650 17 00
Transport Automation und statische WgetechnikTransport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment
+49 171 225 11 95 +49 171 225 11 95
Heavy Industry, Light Industry ohne statische Wgetechnik Heavy Industry, Light Industry excluding Static Weighing
Equipment
Copyright 2007
Schenck Process GmbH
Pallaswiesenstrae 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany
www.schenckprocess.com
Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Jegliche Vervielfltigung dieser All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation,
Dokumentation, gleich nach welchem Verfahren, ist ohne vorherige regardless of method, without prior permission by Schenck Process
schriftliche Genehmigung durch die Schenck Process GmbH, auch GmbH in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited.
auszugsweise, untersagt.
nderungen ohne vorherige Ankndigung bleiben vorbehalten. Subject to change without prior notice.

Hinweis: Originalbetriebsanleitung Note: Translation of the original instructions


Contents VBW

Contents
DEUTSCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

ENGLISH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

FRANAIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

ITALIANO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

ESPAOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

NEDERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

SVENSKA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

SRPSKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

MAGYAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

ESKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 I


Schenck Process
VBW Contents

- Reserved for users notes -

II BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

DEUTSCH

LAUFMELDUNG, BETRIEBSSTATUS H2
EREIGNISMELDUNGEN
Z1 = FOERDERMENGE
I = FOERDERSTAERKE kg/m
L2
QUITTIEREN

BETRIEBS-
BEREIT
{ POWER ON
CPU OK FUNKTION
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg
ABBRECHEN C1
-- I = 100 kg/h L3 L1
ALARM
L4

kg/h
MIN M
MAX
EINGABE FUNKTION
AUS VORBEREITEN STARTEN
EIN S2
ZAEHLER UNTERE ANZEIGE EREIGNISMELDUNGEN
LOESCHEN VORWAEHLEN
FUNKTIONSVERTEILER

gB START/STOP Ein- bzw. Ausschalten wenn vorgewhlt

U SCROLL Untere Anzeige und Funktionen vorwhlen


1. Zhler Z2, Z3 4. Bandbeladung Q
T 2. Frderstrke I 5. Bandgeschwindigkeit v
3. Frderstrke Ir in %

i RESET Zhler lschen


1. Nr. des gewnschten Zhlers eingeben (1 oder 2 )
2. Mit Taste ENTER Eingabe besttigen
3. oder mit Taste ESCAPE Eingabe abbrechen
4. oder mit Taste DELETE falsche Eingabe lschen

G FUNCTION Funktionsverteiler und Ereignismeldungen aufrufen


1. Mit Tasten SCROLL gewnschte Funktion whlen.
Liegt ein Ereignis vor, ist schon die Funktion Ereignisse zeigen
vorgewhlt.
2. Mit ENTER Funktion aktivieren.
3. Mit den Tasten SCROLL knnen nacheinander alle vorliegenden
Ereignismeldungen eingesehen werden.
4. Rcksprung zu den Normalanzeigen mit ESCAPE.

O DELETE Ereignismeldungen quittieren, Eingaben lschen.

N ESCAPE Funktion abbrechen und Rcksprung zu den Normalanzeigen.

f ENTER Eingabe besttigen


Funktionen starten, z.B. Ereignisse anzeigen (siehe bei FUNCTION)

P DATA Eingabe vorbereiten, z.B. Parameter

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 1


Schenck Process
VBW

Reserved for users notes

2 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

ENGLISH
RUNNING MESSSAGE, OPERATING STATUS H2
EVENT MESSAGES
Z1 = FEED AMOUNT
I = FEED RATE kg/m
L2
ACKNOWLEDGE

READY
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg ABORT C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNCTION L3 L1
ALARM L4

kg/h
MIN M
MAX START
STOP PREPARE
ENTRY FUNCTION
START
S2
RESET PRESELECT LOWER EVENT MESSAGES
COUNTER DISPLAY
FUNCTION DISTRIBUTOR

gB START/STOP if preselected

U SCROLL Select lower display line and functions


(1) Counters Z2, Z3 (4) Belt load Q
T (2) Feed rate I (5) Belt speed v
(3) Feed rate Ir in %

i RESET Reset counter(s)


(1) Enter number of desired counter (1 or 2).
(2) Use ENTER key to acknowledge
(3) Use ESCAPE key to abort input
(4) Use DELETE key to delete faulty digits

G FUNCTION Call function distributor and event messages


(1) SCROLL keys let you select desired function
If an event is available, Display Event function is preselected
(2) ENTER key lets you activate function
(3) SCROLL keys let you view available event messages one after the other
(4) ESCAPE key lets you return to normal displays

O DELETE Acknowledge event messages, delete inputs

N ESCAPE Abort function and return to normal displays

f ENTER Acknowledge input


start functions, e.g. Display Events (see FUNCTION)

P DATA Prepare input, e.g. parameters

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 3


Schenck Process
VBW

Reserved for users notes

4 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

FRANAIS
SIGNALISATION DE MARCHE, ETAT DE FONCTIONNEMENT
H2
SIGNALISATION D'EVENEMENT

Z1 = QUANTITE TOLALISEE
I = DEBIT kg/m
L2
ACOUITTER

PRET AU
SERVICE
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg ROMPRE C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FONCTION L3 L1
ALARM L4

kg/h
MIN M
MAX LANCER
PREPARER
ARRET FONCTION
L'ENTREE
MARCHE
S2
M.A.Z. PRESELECTIONNER SIGNALISATION D' EVENEMENTS
COMPTEUR AFFICHAGE
INFERIEUR
MENU DE FONCTION

gB START/STOP Marche ou Arrt si prdtermin

U SCROLL Slectionner laffichage infrieur et fonctions


1. Compteur Z2, Z3 4. Charge sur la bande Q
T 2. Dbit I 5. Vitesse de la bande v
3. Dbit Ir en %

i RESET Effacement compteur


1. Slectionner compteur dsir N. 1 ou 2
2. Avec la touche ENTER confirmer lentre
3. ou avec la touche ESCAPE interrompre lentre
4. ou avec la touche DELETE effacer les mauvaises entres

G FONCTION Slectionner le menu des fonctions et annonces vnements


1. Avec les touches SCROLL choisir la fonction souhaite
Si un vnement se prsente, la fonction indiquer vn. est dj
slectionne
2. Valider la fonction avec ENTER
3. Avec les touches SCROLL on peut consulter les annonces
dvnements existantes les unes aprs les autres
4. Retour aux affichages normaux avec ESCAPE

O DELETE Acquittement des annonces dvnements, effacement entre

N ESCAPE Arrter la fonction et retour aux affichages normaux

f ENTER Valider lentre


Dmarrer les fonctions, par ex. indiquer les vnements (voir sous
FONCTION)

P DATA Prparer une entre, par ex. Paramtre

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 5


Schenck Process
VBW

Reserved for users notes

6 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

ITALIANO

OPERAZ. IN CORSO. STATO FUNZ. H2


MESS. DI EVENTO

Z1 = QAT`TOTALIZZ.
kg/m
I = PORTATA
L2
CONFERMA

PRONTO
AL. FUNZ.
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg INTERR. C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNZIONI L3 L1
ALLARME L4

MIN kg/h
M
MAX AVVIO
OFF INTROD. FUNZIONI
ON VAL. IMP.
S2
AZZER. PREFISS. MESSAGGI EVENTO
TOTALIZZ. INDICAZ. IMP.

MENU INDIR. FUNZIONI

gB START/STOP Inserire o disinserire se selezionata

T SCROLL Selezionare display inferiore e funzioni


1. Totalizzatori Z2, Z3 4. Caricamento del nastro Q
2. Portata I 5. Velocit del nastro v
3. Portata Ir in %

i RESET Azzerare totalizzatore


1. Introdurre n del totalizzatore desiderato (1 o 2 )
2. Con il tasto ENTER confermare lintroduzione
3. oppure con il tasto ESCAPE interrompere lintroduzione
4. oppure con il tasto DELETE cancellare lintroduzione errata

G FUNCTION Richiamare il menu di indirizzamento funzioni e i messaggi di evento


1. Con i tasti SCROLL scegliere la funzione desiderata
In presenza di un evento gi prefissata la funzione Indicare eventi
2. Con ENTER attivare la funzione
3. Con i tasto SCROLL possibile fare visualizzare in successione
tutti i messaggi di evento presenti
4. Ritorno alle indicazioni normali con ESCAPE

O DELETE Confermare i messaggi di evento, cancellare le introduzioni

N ESCAPE Interrompere la funzione e ritornare alle indicazioni normali

f ENTER Confermare lintroduzion


Avviare le funzioni, ad es. visualizzare gli eventi (cf. sotto FUNCTION)

P DATA Preparare lintroduzione, ad es. parametri

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 7


Schenck Process
VBW

Reserved for users notes

8 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

ESPAOL

H2
MENSAJE DE FUNCIONAMIENTO, ESTADO DE FUNCIONAMIENTO,
AVISOS DE ACONTECIMIENTOS

Z1 = CANTIDAD TRASNPORTADA
kg/m
I = RENDIMIENTO
L2
CONFIRMAR

LISTO PARA
OPERACIN { POWER ON
CPU OK CANCELAR
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
FUNCIN L3
-- I = 100 kg/h L1
ALARM
L4

kg/h
MIN M
MAX INICIAR
OFF PREPARAR
FUNCIN
ON ENTRADA
S2
BORRAR PRESELECCIONAR
CONTADOR INDICACIN ANTERIOR
AVISOS DE ACONTECIMIENTOS
DISTRIBUIDOR DE FUNCIONES

gB START/STOP Conexin o desconexin si se ha preseleccionado

U SCROLL Preseleccionar la indicacin inferior y las funciones


1. Contadores Z2, Z3 4. Carga de la cinta Q
T 2. Rendimiento I 5. Velocidad de cinta v
3. Rendimiento Ir en %

i RESET Borrar contador


1. Introducir N del contador deseado (1 o 2 )
2. Con la tecla ENTER confirmar la introduccin
3. o con la tecla ESCAPE cancelar la introduccin
4. o con la tecla DELETE borrar la introduccin errnea

G FUNCTION Activar el distribuidor de funciones y los avisos de acontecimientos


1. Seleccionar la funcin deseada con las teclas SCROLL
Si hay un acontecimiento, ya est preseleccionada la funcin
INDIC. ACONTECIM.
2. Activar la funcin con ENTER
3. Con las teclas SCROLL pueden examinarse uno tras otro todos los
avisos de acontecimientos existentes
4. Regreso a las indicaciones normales con ESCAPE

O DELETE Confirmar los avisos de acontecimientos, borrar las introducciones

N ESCAPE Cancelar la funcin y regresar a las indicaciones normales

f ENTER Confirmar la introduccin


Iniciar las funciones, p. ej. INDIC. ACONTECIM. (vase en FUNCTION)

P DATA Preparar la entrada, p. ej. parmetro

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 9


Schenck Process
VBW

Reserved for users notes

10 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

NEDERLANDS

Lopende melding, Bedrijfstoestand H2


Melding van gebeurtenissen

Z1 = transporthoeveelheid
kg/m
I = transportsterkte
L2
Kwiteren

Bedrijfsklaar
{ POWER ON
CPU OK Functie
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
-- I = 100 kg/h stoppen L3 L1
L4
ALARM
kg/h
MIN
M
MAX Functie
Uit Ingave
voorbereiden starten
In
S2
Teller Onderste stand Storingsmelder
op nul kiezen
Functieverdeler

0 1 START/STOP In-uitschakelen wanneer gekozen

U SCROLL Onderste stand en functies kiezen


1. teller Z2,Z3 4. bandbelading Q
T 2. transportsterkte I 5. bandsnelheid v
3. transportsterkte in %

i RESET Teller op nul (wissen)

1. nummer van de gewenste teller ingeven (1 of 2)


2. met toets ENTER ingave bevestigen
3. of met toets ESCAPE ingaves stoppen
4. of met toets DELET foutieve ingave wissen

G FUNCTION Functieverdeler en storingsmelder oproepen


1. met de toets SCROLL de gewenste functie kiezen. Bij bepaalde
gebeurtenissen storingen), is de functie gebeurtenis tonen reeds
gekozen
2. met ENTER functie activeren
3. met de SCROLL toets kunnen n na n alle meldingen van
gebeurtenissen geraadpleegd worden
4. terug naar hoofdmenu met ESCAPE

O DELETE gebeurtenissen kwiteren, input wissen

N ESCAPE Functie stoppen en terug naar hoofdmenu

f ENTER Inputbevestigen, functie starten, bvb storingen tonen

P DATA Data input voorbereiden, bvb parameter

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 11


Schenck Process
VBW

Reserved for users notes

12 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

SVENSKA

DRIFTSMEDDELANDE, DRIFTSSTATUS H2
HNDELSEMEDDELANDEN
Z1 = MATNINGSMNGD
I = MATNINGSTJOCKLEK kg/m
L2
KVITTERA

DRIFTS-
KLAR { POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg AVBRYTA C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNKTION L3 L1
LARM
L4

kg/h
MIN M
MAX STARTA
FRN FRBERED
INMATNING FUNKTION
TILL
S2
RKNARE VLJ HNDELSEMEDDELANDEN
RADERA UNDRE INDIKERING
FUNKTIONSFRDELARE

gB START/STOPP Till-resp. Frnkoppling om frutvalt

U SCROLL Frval av undre indikering och funktioner


1. Rknare Z2, Z3 4. Bandlast Q
T 2. Matningstjocklek I 5. Bandhastighet v
3. Matningstjocklek Ir i %

i RESET Radera rknare


1. Mata in nr. fr nskad rknare (1 eller 2 )
2. Med tangent ENTER bekrfta inmatning
3. eller med tangent ESCAPE avbryt inmatning
4. eller med tangent DELETE radera felaktig inmatning

G FUNCTION Ropa upp funktionsfrdelare och hndelsemeddelanden


1. Vlj nskad funktion med tangenterna SCROLL
Freligger en hndelse, r redan funktionen visa hndelser vald
2. Aktivera funktionen med ENTER
3. Med tangenterna SCROLL kan alla freliggande hndelsmeddelanden
lsas efter varandra.
4. terhopp till normalindikeringarna med ESCAPE

O DELETE Kvittera hndelsemeddelanden. radera inmatningar

N ESCAPE Avbrott av funktionen och terhopp till normalindikeringarna

f ENTER Bekrfta inmatningen


starta funktioner, t.ex. indikera
hndelser (se under FUNCTION)

P DATA Frbered inmatning, t.ex. parameter

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 13


Schenck Process
VBW

Reserved for users notes

14 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

,
H2

Z1 =
I = /
L2

{ POWER ON
CPU OK
/
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
-- I = 100 kg/h L3 L1

L4

. M
.

.

S2



gB START/STOP

U SCROLL
1. Z2, Z3 4. Q
T 2. I 5. v
3. Ir %

i RESET
1. 1 2
2. ENTER
3. ESCAPE
4.
DELETE

G FUNCTION
1. SCROLL
(). ,
.
2. ENTER.
3. SCROLL
.
4. ESCAPE

O DELETE ,

N ESCAPE

f ENTER
, , (.
FUNCTION)

P DATA , ,

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 15


Schenck Process
VBW

Reserved for users notes

16 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

SRPSKI

PRIJAVA KRETANJA, STATUS POGONA H2


PRIJAVE DOGAAJA

Z1 = KOLIINA KOJA SE TRANSPORTUJE


I = INTENZITET TRANSPORTA kg/m
L2
KVITIRAT
I
SPREMAN ZA { POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
POGON o Z1 = 1500 kg FUNKCIJU C1
-- I = 100 kg/h PREKINUTI L3 L1
ALARM L4

kg/h
MIN M
MAX PRIPREMITI FUNKCIJU
ISKLJUITI DAVANJE STARTOVATI
UKLJUITI PODATAKA
S2
OBRISATI PODATKE DONJI
POKAZIVA PRIJAVE DOGAAJA
BROJAA
PRETHODNO
RASPODELJIVA FUNKCIJA IZABRATI

gh START/STOP Ukljuiti odn. iskljuiti ako je prethodno izabrano

U SCROLL Donji pokaziva i funkcije prethodno izabrati

T
Donji pokaziva i funkcije prethodno izabrati
1. Broja Z2, Z3 4. Optereenje trake Q
2. Intenzitet transporta I 5. Brzina trake v
3. Intenzitet transporta Ir u %

i RESET Obrisati podatke brojaa


1. Dati podatke eljenog brojaa (1 ili 2)
2. Dirkom ENTER potvrditi davanje podataka
3. ili dirkom ESCAPE prekinuti davanje podataka
4. ili dirkom DELETE obrisati pogreno date podatake

G FUNCTION Raspodeljivae funkcija i prijave dogaaja pozvati


1. Dirkom SCROLL izabrati eljenu funkciju. Ako postoji neki dogaaj
funkcija Ereignisse zeigen je ve prethodno izabrana
2. ENTER-om aktivirati funkciju
3. Dirkama SCROLL mogu se pogledati uzastopce sve postojea
prijave dogaaja
4. Povratni skok ESCAPE-om ka normalnim pokazivaima

O DELETE Prijave dogaaja kvitirati, date podatke obrisati

N ESCAPE Funkciju prekinuti i povratni skok u normalne pokazivaef

f ENTER Davanje podataka potvrditi


Funkcije startovati, n.p. pokazati dogaaje (vidi kod FUNCTION)

P DATA Davanje podataka pripremiti, n.p. parametre

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 17


SCHENCK PROCESS
VBW

- Reserved for users notes -

18 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

MAGYAR

FUTSJEL, ZEMLLAPOT H2
ESEMNYZENETEK
Z1 = SZLLTOTT MENNYISG
I = SZLLTTELJESTMNY
L2
NYUGTZS

ZEMKSZ { POWER ON
CPU OK FUNKCI
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
-- I = 100 kg/h MEGSZAKTSA L3 L1
L4
RIASZTS

MIN M
MAX FUNKCI
KI BEVITEL
INDTSA
BE ELKSZTSE
S2
SZMLL ALS KIJELZ ESEMNYZENETEK
TRLS KIVLASZTSA
FUNKCIINTZ

gB START/STOP Be- ill. kikapcsols ha ki van vlasztva

U SCROLL Als kijelz s funkcik kivlasztsa


1. Szmll Z2, Z3 4. Szalagterhels Q
T 2. Szlltteljestmny I 5. Szalagsebessg v
3. Szlltteljestmny Ir %-ban

i RESET Szmll trls


1. A kvnt szmll szmnak bersa (1 vagy 2)
2. ENTER gombbal bevitel megerstse
3. vagy az ESCAPE gombbal bevitel megszaktsa
4. vagy a DELETE gombbal hibs bevitel trlse

G FUNCTION Funkciintz s esemnyzenetek felhvsa


1. A SCROLL gombokkal kivlasztjuk a kvnt funkcit
Ha van esemny, az Esemnyeket mutat funkci
mr ki van vlasztva
2. Az ENTER gombbal aktvra vltjuk a funkcit
3. A SCROLL gombokkal egyms utn megtekinthetjk
az sszes aktulis esemnyzenetet
4. Visszatrs a norml kijelzsekre az ESCAPE billentyvel

O DELETE Esemnyzenetek nyugtzsa, bevitel trlse

N ESCAPE Funkci megszaktsa s visszatrs a norml kijelzsekhez

f ENTER Bevitel megerstse


Funkcik indtsa, pl. Esemnyeket mutat (lsd a FUNCTION gombnl)

P DATA Bevitel elksztse, pl. paramter

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 19


SCHENCK PROCESS
VBW

- Reserved for users notes -

20 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

ESKY

gB START/STOP Zapnut pop. Vypnut (je-li pedvoleno)

U SCROLL Pedvolba spodnho displeje a funkc


1. Potadlo Z2, Z3 4. Zaten psu Q
T 2. Dopravn sla I 5. Rychlost psu v
3. Dopravn sla Ir v %

i RESET Vymazn potadla

1. Zadejte . poadovanho potadla (1 nebo 2 )


2. Vloen daj potvrte pomoc klvesy ENTER
3. nebo zrute pomoc klvesy ESCAPE
4. nebo vymate pomoc klvesy DELETE

G FUNCTION Sputn funknho pepnae a hlen udlost


1. Pomoc klvesy SCROLL zvolte poadovanou funkci
V ppad existujc udlosti je funkce Zobrazen udlosti pedvolena
2. Pomoc ENTER aktivujte funkci
3. Pomoc klvesy SCROLL je mon prohldnout si vechna hlen
po sob
4. Zpt k standardnmu zobrazen pomoc klvesy ESCAPE

O DELETE Potvzen hlen udlost, vymazn dat

N ESCAPE Peruen funkce a nvrat ke standardnmu zobrazen

f ENTER Potvrzen vloench dat


Sputn funkc, nap. zobrazen udlost (viz. FUNCTION)

P DATA Pprava vloen dat, nap. parametry

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 21


Schenck Process
VBW

- Reserved for users notes -

22 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

gB START/STOP . . .

U SCROLL
1. Z2, Z3 4. Q
T 2. I 5. v
3. Ir %

i RESET
1. Nr. (1 2 )
2. ENTER
3. ESCAPE
4. DELETE

G FUNCTION
1. SCROLL
, Ereignisse zeigen
( )
2. ENTER
3. SCROLL
.
4. . ESCAPE

O DELETE ,

N ESCAPE

f ENTER
, . (
FUNCTION ()

P DATA , .

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 23


Schenck Process
VBW

- Reserved for users notes -

24 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
VBW

Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DEUTSCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ESKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ENGLISH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
ESPAOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
FRANAIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ITALIANO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
MAGYAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
NEDERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SRPSKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 25


Schenck Process
VBW

- Reserved for users notes -

26 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions


Schenck Process
INTECONT PLUS Belt Weigher

Operating Manual

BV-H2214GB
PASS - Service you can rely on.
Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world

Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive
service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless
support across the entire product life cycle.

With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever and
wherever you need us. It doesnt matter where you are, our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best in
worldwide, personal, comprehensive service.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on hand to analyse problems and failures.
Look at www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck Process Location.

Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System provides you with the
best service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?
Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections
through to full service. Interested? Then find out more about the individual components at
www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.

Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline in Germany


Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock to
deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.

J +49 171 2 251195 Heavy and Light excluding Static Weighing Equipment

J +49 172 6 501700 Transport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment

by Schenck Process GmbH, 2008


Pallaswiesenstrae 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany
J +49 61 51-15 31 0
www.schenckprocess.com

All information is given without obligation. All specifications are subject to change.

Note: Translation of the original instructions


INTECONT PLUS VBW

Contents

1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Power ON 4
Signal Lamps 4
Normal Displays 5
Control In Normal Mode 5
Event Messages 6
Function Distributor 8
Display Test and Version Number 8
Batching Mode 9
Visual Make-up 11
Keyboard Mode 11
Activate/Deactivate EasyServe 12
Prefeeder 12
Printing 12
Zero Setting 16
Read Parameters 17
3 Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4 Operating Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7 Setting Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Function Distributor 33
Calibrating Functions 34
Belt Circuit LB 34
Tare TW 35
Weight Check CW 36
Set Time 38
Simulation Mode 38
8 Service Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
9. Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Preselect Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Enter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Parameters Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
10 Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
System Messages S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Electrics E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Calibration C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Maximum H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Minimum L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Batching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
0837 11 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


this documentation are not permitted. Schenck Technische CONTENTS
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
and copyrights.
Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB I - 1
VBW INTECONT PLUS

How To Operate Your INTECONT 85


Mechanical Prerequisites 86
Electrical Prerequisites 86
Enter Parameters 87
Functional Check 88
Calibration 89
Check Using Check Weight 89
Check Belt Speed 90
Check Using Material 90
Automatic Zero Setting 91
Belt Run Monitoring 91
Belt Influence Compensation BIC 92
Control for Point of Discharge CPD 92
Cosine Pendulum 93
Test Plug 93
12 Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Start / Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Batching Without Clearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Batching With Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Data Flow Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Base Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Weighing Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1. Effective Platform Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2. Check Weight QPRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3. Conveyor Belt Inclination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Printer Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
13 Replacement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Replacing INTECONT PLUS FIP > INTECONT PLUS VEG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

This manual applies to software version: VBW 20600-08

Edition : 0837

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


CONTENTS Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB I-2 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

1 Overview

What Is The INTECONT: Display:

INTECONT PLUS is designed as measuring and 5 x 7 - dot matrix with 6 mm character height
evaluation system for
Upper display left : running message
Belt Weighers right : delivery rate in kg or t
Solids Flow Meters
Mass Flow Meters Lower display left : event messages
Mass Flow Feeders right : selectable
Weighfeeders feed rate, belt speed
Loss-in-weight Feeders etc.

Three system versions are available: Display can be changed over to American units.

1. Without option card (standard) LEDs:

2. With option card VFE 610V for additional 2 green and 3 red LEDs
input/outputs and printer Green LEDs : Ready
Red LEDs : Error or limit value
3. With option card for fieldbus messages
VSS021V : Modbus/S5
VPB 020V: Profibus Keyboard:
VCB020V: DeviceNet
VET020V: MODBUS/TCP Flexible membranes with tactile touch
VET022V: ETHERNET/IP
gB Start/stop measurement
This manual applies to belt weighers using the fully
equipped INTECONT variant. TU Preselect lower display
Select functions
i Reset counter
For Further Reading: G FUNC Call function distributor and
Fieldbus manual BVH2220 event texts
SS-RK512 (3964R) FH 458
Modbus (Comp) FH 525 O DEL Acknowledge event messages
Delete input

O Z1 = 1 2 0 0 0 kg
E1 I = 1 0 0 0 kg/h

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Overview
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 1
VBW INTECONT PLUS

The basic diagram shows all inputs and outputs.


N ESC Abort function

f ENT Start function


Acknowledge input
P DAT Prepare input
B9 Enter parameters
KL Enter sign and decimal point

Some Definitions:

I = Feed rate in kg/hr or t/hr


Material amount discharged from belt
per unit time
O Z1 = 1500 kg
Z = Delivery rate in kg or t I= 100 kg/h
Material amount fed out = feed rate x feed time

V = Belt speed in m/s

Q = Belt load in kg/m


Material weight on one belt meter

Measuring Principle:

Belt load Q and speed V are continuously measured


and multiplied. L/C = Load cell for acquisition of belt load Q
The result is feed rate I used to determine delivery
rate. D = Speed transducer

I in kg/hr S = Belt circuit sensor for automatic belt


Q in kg/m influence compensation BIC
V in m/s (non-standard)

24 V = Power supply
Measurement techniques:
V = Speed transducer
n Precision AC voltage amplifier with continuous
correction of zero point and range Q = Load cell

n Highly resolving analog-to-digital converter ANALOG= Analog output selectable for feed rate,
The integrated method is designed to efficiently belt load, belt speed
suppress line voltage interferences.
SERIAL = Serial interfaces for printer and host
n 16-bit microcontroller computer

n Unlimited storage of counter readings, MIN = Relay output for limit value monitoring
configuration and calibration data. Open = MIN value exceeded down

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Overview Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 2 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

MAX = Relay output for limit value monitoring


Open = MAX value exceeded up
Feed rate, belt load, or belt speed, can be
monitoring separately for excess of MIN
and MAX values.

FAULT = Relay output for alarms


Open = Alarm

FULL = Relay output for full feed in batching


mode
Closed = full feed

DRIBBLE = Relay output for dribble feed


Closed = dribble feed

MOTOR = Control output for belt drive


Closed = ON

PREF. = Control output for prefeeder


Closed = On

RELEASE Release signal for totalization


= H = Release

ON/OFF = Start scale and totalization.


High = ON

OFF = Stop
Low = STOP

COUNTER= Pulse output for connection of external


totalizing counter

For simple measuring tasks, with constant belt speed,


speed transducer D can be omitted.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Overview
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 3
VBW INTECONT PLUS

2 Control

Power ON Signal Lamps

During power failure

Counter readings
Counter pulses not yet output
Preselected normal displays
Service values, e.g. ON-time
Z1 = 2 5 0 0 kg
E1 I = 0 kg/h
remain stored for an endless period of time.
The internal clock continues running for approx. 5
days.

After power-on, display and lamps are automatically


tested before version number of system is displayed
for some seconds to be then replaced by the normal a (green) POWER OK
displays. lights if all power supplies are OK.
b (green) CPU OK
lights if microprocessor is ready to
operate.
Z1 = 2 5 0 0 kg X (red) ALARM
E1 I = 0 kg/h flashes if an Alarm event is
available.
In addition, an event code appears
in lower display line.

Message E1
MIN (red) MIN LIMIT VALUE
reports power failure and can be defined as ALARM or lights if feed rate limit value is
WARNING. exceeded down.

ALARM:
Red lamp
flashing.
X
and message E1 are MAX (red) MAX LIMIT VALUE
lights if feed rate limit value is
To start scale, first acknowledge exceeded up.
message.

WARNING:
Signal lamp X remains dark, READY:

message E1 does not flash. The two green signal lamps must be lit, and no Alarm
Start/stop scale automatically or in message available.
manual. No acknowledgement is
required.
O Lets you acknowledge event
message.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Control Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 4 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Normal Displays Control In Normal Mode

Upper Display g Start totalization


Prerequisite : External release signal
Left Rotating point as running message. available (selectable)
Scale has started, totalized amount START source (B06)
and feed rate are acquired. set to OP or Keyboard
In stop state of scale (point stands Mode active.
still) only belt load and belt speed are Feature : Rotating point in left field
measured. of upper display
Right Totalizing counter Z1

Lower Display B Stop totalization


Feature : Point stands still
Belt load and belt speed continue
Left Event message, alphanumerically
being measured.
coded, e.g. E1 for power failure.
Right Selectable display
i Reset totalizing counters.
TU Select display This function has to be activated with
parameters A10 or A11.
1 Enter number of desired counter
(1 or 2).
O Z1 = 50 000 kg
Counter no. : _
Z2 = 60 0 kg/h
Counter 3 cannot be reset. In case of
overflow, counting resumes from 0.
f Acknowledge input.
N Correct faulty input or accidental use
of DELETE key.
TU Select lower display
(see Normal Display).
Counter Z2 Z2 = 6000 kg
Counter Z3 Z3 = 1000 kg O Acknowledge event messages.
Feed rate I = 1000 kg/hr G Call further functions, e.g. display
Feed rate Ir = 50.00 % 1) event messages, calibration.
Belt load Q = 10.000 kg/m
Belt load Qr = 50.0% 2) N Exit function distributor.
Belt speed V = 0.0500 m/s
Batching displays Zb, ZI, Zd, Nb 3)

1) related to nominal feed rate


2) related to nominal belt load
3) see Batching Mode.

Display formats and units of counters Z1, Z2, Z3 and I


can be selected separately.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 5
VBW INTECONT PLUS

n WARNING 2 Display permanent, not


Event Messages underscored

Definitions Acknowledgement:
None
All important scale functions are internally monitored,
n IGNORE No event monitoring, save
and faults are reported by event message.
MIN/MAX messages via contact
outputs and signal lamps.
For troubleshooting details, see Event Messages
item.
If several events occur at the same time, the most
significant event is displayed first.
Priority: Alarm, Warning 1, Warning 2

Z1 = 2500 kg
E1 I = 0 kg/h
Operation

O Acknowledge events of ALARM and


WARNING 1 classes after
Message E1 Power Failure elimination of fault. If several events
are available, acknowledge one
Group code (e.g. E) and number (e.g. 1) appear in left
after the other.
field of lower display.
In addition, an explanatory text can be called up.

The events are organized into 4 classes. The Display event texts:
assignment between event and class can be selected
using relevant parameter. G Call function distributor.
n ALARM Display is underscored and TU Scroll Show Event function into
flashes. lower display field.

Red signal lamp X flashes. f Select function.

Totalization stops, scale is


inoperable.

Start:
If cause of Alarm has been
removed and error message
acknowledged.

Acknowledgement:
If cause of Alarm has not been
removed, flashing stops but
message is still on display.

n WARNING 1 Display permanent and


underscored Totalization goes on.
Acknowledgement:
If cause of fault is still present,
underscores are faded out.
0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Control Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 6 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

H3 v > MAX
H4 L/C Input > MAX

1. Event S 2 = O 0 7 Minimum L L1 I < MIN


No Release L2 Load < MIN
L3 v < MIN
L4 L/C Input < MIN

Display shows I = Feed Rate

event name e.g. No Release V = Belt Speed


event code e.g. S2
and a note e.g. Parameter O07. L/C = Load Cell

The note informs the operator of relevant parameter. * Fault on device or cabling

TU Let you view various events.


N Return to normal displays.

Contact Outputs
List of Events
General Alarm available until acknowledged
The events are listed in accordance with display MIN/MAX Outputs independent of event class,
priority. active also in IGNORE class.
Limit values are reported as long
as event is available and only
System messages S1 Memory Error with active scale.
S2 No Release*
S3 Scale Maintenance ON
S4 Maintenance Interval
Electrics
S7 Simulation active
S9 Host Communication

Electrics E1 Power Failure


E2 Namur Error Tacho*
E3 Namur Error Sensor*
E6 Error Ext. Event

Material flow B1 Out of Tolerance


B4 BATCH Actual Value MAX

Calibration C C1 L/C Input *


C2 Tacho Input *
C3 Belt Skew
C4 Belt Drift
C5 Tare Correction > MAX
C7 ZERO Time
C8 Slip Error
C9 Tare Diff > MAX

Maximum H H1 I > MAX


0837 H2 Load > MAX

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 7
VBW INTECONT PLUS

B = If batching mode is selected, you can access


Function Distributor additional functions in main distributor.

The function distributor lets you call further functions, Abort Batch
or dialogs. Deselect Batch
Batch Number
G Call function distributor. Print Batch
If no event is available, display shows Make-up
function selected last. Next = Belt Empty
f Start function.
S = Calibrating functions protected by password.
N Return to normal display and/or Prompt is output after call of function.
abort function.
E = If an event is available

Z = Iif activated via parameter


Function
Moving through function distributor has no effect on
Display Events
weighing functions.

Display Test and Version Number


TU Scroll through function distributor
Lets you check displays and signal lamps.
Display Events E
G Call display test.
Test Display
1. Display elements flash
START/STOP Prefeeder Z
rhythmically.
Service Values TU 2. Version number is displayed for
Batch Number B
apr. 3 s.
Print Counter Readings
>0< Zero Set f Test terminates automatically.
START/STOP Keyboard Mode
Activate/Deactivate EasyServe
Programming
Calibrating Functions S
INTECONT PLUS
Read Parameters VBW 20600-00 2482
Enter Parameters S
Load Default Parameters S
Print Parameters
Status Report Example:
Tare S VBW : Belt Weigher
START/STOP Simulation 20600-00 : Version number
Check Weight S
Imp/Belt Circuit S
Set Time S

Programming and calibrating functions lead to further 0837


menus you can move through using cursor keys.

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Control Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 8 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Select Batching Mode


Batching Mode
Selection of batching mode enables batching,
Additional Displays however, no batch is started yet.
Condition: scale OFF and function activated via
parameter A07.

G Call function distributor.


O Z1 = 2500 kg TU Scroll Select Batch into display
ZI = 400 kg
field.
f Select function.

Upper display : If batching mode is selected, a System prompts for input of batch setpoint.
totals sign is displayed left of If batch is selected from external PC, setpoint input is
running message. omitted.
Lower display : Use cursor keys to scroll 4 Enter Setpoint
additional values into display field.
Setpoint prompt is output automatically upon selection
U 1. Zb = Batch setpoint or can be started in manual when batch is complete
(scale OFF).
2. ZI = Batch actual value If batching mode is deselected or a batch is running,
Amount already no input is possible.
discharged When presetting batch setpoint via fieldbus
(Parameter I09 Batch Source = FB), no input is
3. Zd = Batch residual value possible either. This also applies to the input of batch
Amount not yet number and make-up setpoint.
discharged
P Prepare setpoint input.
Zd = Zb - ZI
19 Enter setpoint in kg or t
Max. 9 digits including decimal
4. Nb = Consecutive batch
point.
number The unit is that of counter 1.
Use Batch Number
function to set initial value.

. Setpoint Batch
Before a batch starts, ZI and Zd indicate the amounts Zb = . . . . . . kg
fed out during previous batch.
If you deselect batching mode (Deselect Batch functi-
on), displays are disabled but enabled again upon
next selection.

The display format corresponds to the format of


counter 1. f Acknowledge input.
N Abort input, old setpoint remains
stored.
O Delete faulty digits.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 9
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Start and Abort Make-up

Lets you add a selected amount of material to a batch


g Start batch, process starts. aborted or complete.
Prerequisites : Running batch complete, scale OFF.
Display ZI moves from 0 towards No batch printout.
setpoint
Display Zd moves from setpoint Display ZI : Batch actual setpoint resumes from
towards 0. achieved value.
B Abort batch. Display Zd : Batch residual value remains
unchanged.
Batching continues upon next start
command. Display Zbn : Make-up setpoint

Deselect Batch Display Zdn : Batch residual value of make-up


amount
Lets you deselect batching mode, i.e. mode is removed Zdn = Zbn - make-up amount
from active functions available. already fed.
Totals sign disappears from upper display, batching
You can scroll all displays into lower display field
values ZI, Zd, Zb and Nb are no longer available, but
using cursor keys.
remain stored.
Zdn and Zbn are available only until start of next
Prerequisites : Batch complete, or aborted using batch.
Abort Batch function; scale OFF.
GT Call function distributor and select
GT Call function distributor, Make-up function.
select Deselect Batch function,
f Acknowledge.
and acknowledge.
f System prompts for input of
make-up setpoint Zbn in kg or t.
The units is that of Counter 1.
Use Select Batch function to reactivate batching
mode.
Old values ZI, Zd, Zb and Nb can be viewed again. P Until start of make-up, setpoint Zbn
can be changed.
Abort Batch
gB Start or abort make-up
This function lets you abort a running batch, i.e.
batching immediately stops.
Batching mode remains selected.

New batch starts upon next start command, old batch If make-up batch is complete, normal batch starts
is not resumed. upon next start command.
Use Make-up function to complete old batch. For new make-up, call function again.
Abort Batch function also aborts make-up
GT Call function distributor and select operations.
Abort Batch function.
f Acknowledge.

You can also abort batch using the P02 contact.


0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Control Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 10 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Batch Number Nb
Visual Make-up
Select a number incrementing by 1 after start of every
new batch.
A batch report can be printed only if batch is complete
The consecutive number is printed in batch report and
(setpoint reached).
indicated in lower display line.
Belonging to previous batch, make-up operations are If an unspecified amount is to be batched using the
not counted. START/STOP keys, the results can be printed using a
little trick:
GT Call function distributor and select
1. Call Select Batch function.
Batch Number function.
2. Enter very high batch setpoint,
f Acknowledge. e.g. 999999999 kg.
Prompt Nb = - is output. 3. Scroll batch actual value ZI into lower display field.
4. Start scale.
f Acquire input. 5. If desired amount ZI is reached, stop scale.
N Abort input. 6. Call Abort Batch function.
Old number remains stored. 7. Start printing
(see Print Batch).

Current number can be changed also while a batch is Make-up can be performed only before print
running. command. To start next batch, resume from item 4.

Next = Belt Empty


Keyboard Mode
One-off changeover to clearance mode.
Next batch is controlled via prefeeder. When batch is
complete, conveyor belt still performs approx. 1/2 belt This function lets you place the selected control
circuit. source for

Prerequisites : Scale OFF, Start/Stop, Batch setpoint


batch complete,
prefeeder control present and on the INTECONT keyboard. If you deselect Keyboard
active. Mode, the old source is active again. When changing
Batching mode without clearance. over from external source (e.g. serial) to keyboard, the
Start/Stop status remains stored; vice versa, the
external signal is active.
GT Call function distributor and select
Next - Belt Empty function. GT Call function distributor and select
Start Keyboard Mode or Stop
f Acknowledge. Keyboard Mode functions.

g Start batch.
Display feature:
You will know Keyboard Mode by the rectangle in the
upper left display field.

Condition : This function has to be activated


with the parameter A06.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 11
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Activate/Deactivate EasyServe Printing

This function lets you control your INTECONT using The printing functions are available only if the option
the EasyServe PC service tool. card is present.

GT Call function distributor and select Print Batch


Activate EasyServe function.
The batch report can be printed:
1. using Print Batch function
Enter communication parameters using Block R.
2. automatically after each complete batch
(Parameter J02 = YES).
Condition: This function has to be activated
with the parameter A09.
Start of printing disables the Make-up function for the
current batch.
Prerequisites : Batch complete, scale OFF.
Note: Upon power failure, the current
Print format : Order of sequence, line and column
status is stored, i.e. the Activate
divisions can be selected at will
EasyServe function needs not be
(Parameter Block J).
reselected.
GT Call function distributor and select
Print Batch function.
Connection to PC can also be made using a 9-pole Start function.
SUB-D connector on X4 (RS 232 only) or a Phoenix
connector on X5 (RS232, RS422 or RS485). N Abort printing.
See also Wiring Diagram in chapter DETAILS.

Prefeeder Batch Nummer 40


20.11.02 16:49:41
Batch Setpoint 0.150 t
The Start/Stop Prefeeder function lets you activate or Batch Actual Val. 0.150 t
deactivate prefeeder. Select Start, and INTECONT Totalizer 1 0.806t
will control your prefeeder. In Stop state, material flow Totalizer 2 806.47 kg
is interrupted and scale can be tared. Zero Set beforer 19 min.

Events
Prerequisites : External prefeeder present and E1 Power Failure O01
controlled by INTECONT.
Activate function using parameter
N 01.

GT Call function distributor and select Batch Number: Consecutive number of batch
Start Prefeeder or Stop Prefeeder 20.11.02: Date and time
function. Batch Setpoint: Preset batch amount
f Start control signal. Batch Actual Val.: Amount batched (actual value)
Totalizer 1:
Totalizing counter 1

Totalizer 2: Totalizing counter 2


Zero Set before: Feeder run time after last taring or
zeroing operation (see Service
Values) 0837
Events : available during printing

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Control Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 12 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Print Counter Readings (FMZ), Quantity Report Print Events

This report is identical with the batch report, however, Parameter J03 lets you select/deselect printout of
the numerical values are identified as sub-totals by event messages.
the # symbol.
There are 3 options:
If no batching mode is selected, batch number, batch
setpoint and batch actual value are not printed. This 1. No printout (NO)
type of report figures as Quantity Report.
2. Print events (error)
Batch actual value [kg] # 998 #
etc. 3. Print events and counter readings (YES)
(see Printer Counter Readings)

Call:

1) Use Print Counter Readings function. 20.11.02 11:45:21 L2 W1 Load > MAX
Unlike the Print Batch function, printing is 20.11.02 11:59:01 L2 W1 Load < MIN
possible during running batch.

2) Printed automatically upon every event printout


(Parameter J03 = YES)
L2 :
Event code
Print Parameters W1 :
Error class, e.g. WARNING 1
Event has occurred
:
Print complete parameter list with current values. Cause removed, event acknowledged, if
:
Inputs differing from default values are identified by *. required.
The list is complete with all possible event messages Load<MIN: Explanation
and the current hardware assignment.

Event is displayed on INTECONT as long as


PARAMETER PRINTOUT available.

INTECONT PLUS VBW 20600-01 2482 For more information, see Event Messages item.
20.11.02 16:59:51

BLOCK A Dialog Behaviour


01 Language ENGLISH
02 Units SI

BLOCK B Rated Data


01 Feed Rate Unit kg/h
02 Nominal Feed Rate * 1,000 t/h
etc.

GT Call function distributor and select


Print Parameters function.
f Start function.
N Abort printing at any time.
0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 13
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Print Zero Setting Results

The result of the automatic zero setting function can STATUS REPORT INTECONT PLUS
be printed automatically after every belt circuit. 25.11.02 13:37:12
Prerequisite:Parameter H 01 = YES (Auto Zero Active)
Software : VBW 20600-01 2482
Parameter H09 = YES Hardware version :1
Option card version :1
Station address :1
Tare correction is the total of all zero point changes; -------------------------------
Latest Report of: 25.11.02 12:13:13
total tare additionally includes the basic tare. ------------ -------------------
Values correspond to same-name parameters SPC values:

D 03/05. Zero Set before : 4086 min


Voltage ON-time : 68 h
Feeder ON-time : 68 h
Latest password entry of : 22.11.02 17:02:12
Latest matkor change : 15.11.02 15:02:34

K05 SPC Time :1h


K06 SPC Filter : 1.00 h
Print Zero Setting Results Feed rate
Mean value Imitt : 0.15 %
Variance : 0.09 %
Total Tare [kg/m] 50,23 Tare Correction T [kg/m] 1,56 Belt load Q MAX :0%
Time Q MIN :0%
Totalizer 3 : 510 t
Belt skew : 0.00 %
Belt Drift : 0.00 cm

Latest taring results (max. 5) T in % of Qnenn


22.11.02 16:04:05 : 12.99 %
21.11.02 16:11:22 : 30.75 %
21.11.02 16:10:53 : 33.40 %
22.11.02 16:05:22 : 12.99 %
22.11.02 16:04:43 : 12.99 %
Status Report
Test weight check of 16.06.03 16:23:17
25.11.02 09:06:28
The status report can be printed at any time. Set/Act 0.9643

Reported are previous events, calibration results, and N05 BIC Active NO
Events since power on
SPC measurement values, e.g. feed rate variance. 1 * H03 v> MAX
1 * C07 Set Time To Zero
1 * E01 Power Failure
SPC = Statistic Process Control

For individual data, see Service Values item.

GT Call function distributor and select Zero Set before:


Status Report function. Zero point corrected by taring program or
manual/automatic zero setting.
f Start function.
Voltage ON-time:
N Abort printing at any time. Total voltage ON-time.

Feeder ON-time:
Total ON-time of conveyor belt and INTECONT.

Last password entry on:


Date of last password input for start of a service function
or parameter change.

Latest matkor change:


The matkor parameter lets you change feed rate and
totalization range.

SPC time:
Measuring time for SPC values Qmax and TQ < MIN. 0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Control Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 14 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

SPC filter: Feed Rate Diagram


Filter time for SPC values mean value and variance
Printed automatically after status report, the feed rate
Mean value Imitt: diagram shows the current feed rate value in percent
Feed rate mean value exponentially filtered using the of nominal feed rate. The report period is determined
SPC filter time related to nominal feed rate. by Parameter K 05 SPC Time .

Variance:
Feed rate variance related to the square of nominal feed Feed Rate in Percent Pnenn
rate. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 %

Belt load QMAX: - 6h * 5,000 t/h


Maximum belt load during last few hours limited by SPC - 5h * 10,000 t/h
time related to nominal belt load. - 4h * 20,000 t/h
- 3h >
- 2h * 40,000 t/h
Time Q < MIN:
- 1h * 50,000 t/h
Total time during which belt load was below Qmin - 0h * 50,000 t/h
(Parameter F 05), evaluated over the past few hours
(SPC time).

Last taring results (max. 5):


Results (total tare) of last 5 zero point or tare corrections, The actual diagram resolution is higher than shown in
related to nominal belt load. sample.
Feed rate 50 dots for nominal feed rate
Test weight check on : Time : 32 dots for time K 05
Date and time of last check using check weight, Units : t/h, h
performed using Weight Check CW setting program. Initialisation : upon power-up and change of
Parameter K 05.
BIC active: Symbol > : Feed rate exceeds 140 %
indicates whether automatic belt influence
compensation is active, or not.

Events report:
lists number and type of events occurred after last
printout.
If no report has been printed yet, counting starts from
time of power-up.

Counter 3:
Totalizing counter 3

Belt skew:
indicates change in belt length in % of total belt length
(Parameter D06).

Belt drift:
indicates belt drift in cm.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 15
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Program complete:
Zero Setting

0. Dev. 70.2 %
The zero setting program is designed to acquire the belt Tarkor 1.12 %
weighers zero point error over one or multiple integer
belt circuits.
In normal mode, value is used to correct current
measuring result.
If no automatic mode is selected, use program in regular
intervals. Upper display: Deviation of zero point from
During zero setting, totalizing counters stop counting. previous zero setting operation in %
of nominal belt load.
Prerequisite:1. Conveyor belt totally unloaded. Dev = + : error increased
If necessary, abort program. Dev = - : error decreased.
User Start Prefeeder function, if Lower display: Deviation of zero point from basic
available. tare in % of nominal belt load.
Taring program corrects basic tare
2. Belt running, during calibration.
indicated automatically.
Acquire result, or view for information and reject.
3. No batch active; batching mode can
remain active. f Acquire result.
Scale zero point is corrected.
4. This function has to be activated with
the parameter A08. N Abort program.
Result is rejected.
Call:

G Call Zero Setting function and start. Restart prefeeder.

If belt is not running, program aborts Event messages:


TU and requests START.
1- C7 Zero setting time elapsed.
f Deselect message, if not desired.
Program running:
2- Value Excessive
Zeroing range exceeded; clean
scale and retare, if necessary.

0. >0< 70.2 % 3. Note:


Tarkor 1.12 % The function setting to zero can also be
started via the digital input P05. The
program is started by a positive flank of the
contact. The result is automatically accepted
if it is within the admissible zero setting limit
(5% of the nominal belt load). An
Upper display: Residual run time in % of total run
ackowledgement of the result is not
time.
necessary. The calibration program can only
Lower display: Zero point error in %, related to
be aborted in its active phase.
nominal belt load.

N Abort program at any time. 0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Control Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 16 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Read Parameters

Parameters are defined as variable characteristics or


data used to match INTECONT to the particular
application.
Parameter input is protected by password (see Enter
Parameters).
The Read Parameters function lets you view all
parameters without jeopardizing the operating
reliability.

The parameters are organized into function blocks A ,


B,... and consecutively numbered within a block.

GTf Scroll Programming function into


display field and acknowledge.
Tf Select Read Parameters
sub-function.

Display shows title of first parameter block.

Dialog Behaviour
Block: A

TU Scroll through parameter blocks


A, B,...
fT Scroll through parameters within a
block.

Nominal Feed Rate


B02 1000.0 kg/h

N Return to blocks.
N Return to normal displays.

For more information, see Enter Parameters.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 17
VBW INTECONT PLUS

This page left intentionally blank

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Control Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 18 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

3 Control Overview

RUNNING MESSSAGE, OPERATING STATUS H2


EVENT MESSAGES
Z1 = FEED AMOUNT
I = FEED RATE kg/m
L2
ACKNOWLEDGE

READY
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg ABORT C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNCTION L3 L1
ALARM L4

kg/h
MIN M
MAX START
STOP PREPARE
ENTRY FUNCTION
START
S2
RESET PRESELECT LOWER EVENT MESSAGES
COUNTER DISPLAY
FUNCTION DISTRIBUTOR

gB Start/Stop if preselected
U SCROLL Select lower display line and functions.
(1) Counters Z2, Z3 (4) Belt load Q
(2) Feed rate I (5) Belt speed v
T (3) Feed rate Ir in %
i RESET Reset counter(s)
(1) Enter number of desired counter (1 or 2).
(2) Use ENT key to acknowledge.
(3) Use ESCAPE key to abort input.
(4) Use DELETE key to delete faulty digits.
G FUNCTION Call function distributor and event messages

(1) SCROLL keys let you select desired function.


If an event is available, Display Event function is preselected.
(2) ENTER key lets you activate function.
(3) SCROLL keys let you view available event messages one after the other.
(4) ESCAPE key lets you return to normal displays.

O DELETE Acknowledge event messages, delete inputs.


N ESCAPE Abort function and return to normal displays.
f ENTER Acknowledge input, e.g. setpoint,
start functions, e.g. Display Events (see FUNCTION).
P DATA Prepare input, e.g. parameters.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control Overview
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 19
VBW INTECONT PLUS

This page left intentionally blank

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Control Overview Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 20 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

4 Operating Principle

A belt weigher is designed to continuously weigh the Belt Speed:


material amount transported on a conveyor belt.
A further measure for feed rate is belt speed v,
Belt Load: acquired with the use of speed transducer D and
translated into a corresponding pulse frequency.
The material is guided to a weighing platform If belt load is constant and more approximate
arranged under the belt and limited by 2 carrying accuracy will suffice, speed measurement can be
idlers. Via one or multiple weighed idlers, the platform omitted.
load excerts a force on load cell (L/C).
The deflection for measurement is 0.2 mm. The
weighed idlers are connected with the frame structure,
e.g. with the use of a leaf spring parallel system. Feed Rate:

INTECONT normalizes physical units kg/m and m/s.


Multiplication of the two values results in feed rate I.

I in kg/s
v in m/s
Q in kg/m
QB in kg
Leff in m

I in kg/h:

I in kg/h
Proportional to platform load, the load cell output As to the rest,
voltage is amplified and transferred to the INTECONT see above.
microprocessor with the use of an analog-to-digital
converter.
The white triangle indicates the load distribution on a
single-idler platform scale. Only half of the materials
weight force is applied to the weighed idler.

The translation of load ratio into platform length has


become accepted usage in weighing technology.

Leff = effective platform


length
Lg = total platform length

For weighing platforms equipped with multiple


weighed idlers, factor 1/2 is different.

Belt load in kg/m is thus:

QB = total load on
weighing platform.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Operating Principle
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 21
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Automatic Belt Influence Compensation (BIC): Batching:

In batching mode, a preselected material amount is


fed. When batch setpoint is reached, batching stops.
Batching can be controlled via conveyor belt drive or
material prefeeder.

Control via belt drive:

In this mode, the conveyor belt is still fully loaded after


complete batch.

Not even the best of conveyor belts is perfectly even;


particulary in welding points, the belt will be heavier
and stiffer. The figure above shows the relations over
one belt circuit in exaggerated fashion.

Therefore, a high accuracy can normally be ensured


only over entire belt circuits, i.e. over the mean value.
INTECONT is able to acquire and correct this
influence with the use of a belt circuit sensor and a
metal belt mark.
This considerably increases the scales short-term
accuracy.
To enable variations to be considered during 0 Start batch and conveyor belt.
operation, the belt influence is continuously
measured. The compensation adaptively follows up, 1 Abort batch
also if material is fed. or

Measurement at the point of discharge (CPD): 2 resume at any time.

3 Reduce belt speed, change over to dribble feed.

4 Stop conveyor belt.

5 Drive stops, batch setpoint is reached.

For constructional reasons, the weighing platform is


not directly located at the point of material discharge.
Therefore, if belt load varies, the feed rate measuring
result does not exactly correspond to the current feed
rate at the point of discharge.
A special speed-dependent delay elements shifts the
measurement to the discharge point.
To do so, no special load transducers are required;
however, the additional use of the automatic belt 0837
influence compensation is reasonable.

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Operating Principle Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 22 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Control via prefeeder:

Batch complete, conveyor belt is empty.

0 Start batch and conveyor belt.


Open prefeeder.

1 Stop belt, if necessary; cut off belt and prefeeder


drive.

2 Resume batching.

3 Changeover to dribble feed is possible, but not


always reasonable.

4 Stop prefeeder if precalculated distance to


setpoint is reached.

5 Batch complete.
Conveyor belt continues running for approx. 1/2
belt circuit.

Dribble feed and cut-off point are self-optimizing, i.e.


they are automatically corrected after every batch.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Operating Principle
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 23
VBW INTECONT PLUS

This page left intentionally blank

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Operating Principle Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 24 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

5. Technical Data

n Panel-mounting unit VEG 20600/20610 n Surface-mounting unit: with panel mounting unit
VEG 20...
Front panel : 96 x 288 mm
Panel cut-outs : 88 x 282, wall thickness n Wall-mounting housing
max. 10 mm
Mounting depth : min. 225 mm Measuring
(including 50 mm for systems : width x height x depth
connectors) 410x330x236mm
Protected to : IP 20, front to IP 65 Feeding
Material : plastic grey to RAL 7022 systems : width x height x depth
Display : fluorescent, 2 lines of 20 500x600x300mm
characters, 6 mm high Protected to : IP 65
Keyboard : flexible membranes with Material : steel sheet, 1.5 mm, grey
tactile touch Voltage supply : 90...264V/50Hz...60Hz
Signal lamps : LEDs, 2 x green, 3 x red Extension : Feed unit controller
Power supply : 24 V(DC) 50 % -25%,
n Environment
max. 1 A,
no fuse, pole-reversal Temperature : -25 C ... +45 C,
protective circuit tested to -40C
Ext. power supply : 90...264V/ 50HZ...60HZ Humidity : Class F (DIN 40 040) *
Interference :
immunity
to IEC 801
Z1 = 2500 kg Interference
I = 0 kg/h
suppression : to VDE 871, EN 55 011

Housing safety : to IEC 348


EC recommen-
dations : CE label

* Tropical version (class R) upon request

n Storage temperature

-40 C ... +60 C

n Connectors

Plug/screw connectors (Phoenix Combicon),


non-confusible

n Control outputs

Number : 8 N/O relay contacts


Base board : 3
Option card : 5
Load : max. 230 V(AC)
0837 8 A resistive load, 1 A
inductive

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Technical Data
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 25
VBW INTECONT PLUS

If error message CPU Not OK is output, all contacts n External totalizing pulse counter
open.
Frequency : max. 10 Hz
n Control Pulse length : selectable 50...1000 ms
Output : 24 V, max. 100 mA
Number : 5 optionally active low or active
Base card : 3 high,
Option card : 2 galvanically isolated,
Type : 24 V(DC) +/-30 %, 5 mA, short-circuit-proof, limited to
galvanically isolated apr. 350 mA,
negative amounts are stored
internally and must be
compensated by positive
n Control inputs (NAMUR) amounts before new pulse is
output.
Number : 2
This ensures integral
Type : NAMUR (DIN 19234),
accuracy also with minimal
short-circuit and cable
belt load.
breakage monitoring
n Serial printer interface
n Analog output
Number : 1 (option card)
Number : 2
Type : RS 232 (V24), max. 38400
Base card : 1
baud
Option card :
1
Data format : 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no
Current : raise ...20 mA impressed parity
Raise : 0... <20 mA Isolation : galvanically non-isolated
Load : max. 500 ohms Connectors : Phoenix MSTB, contat
Reference : 0 V by user, spacing 3.5 mm, max.
galvanically isolated 1.5 mm2
Resolution : 12 bits +/- 1 d Character map : ISO-Latin-1 (ISO-8859-1)
If error message CPU Not OK is output, output n Load cell connection
signal turn 0 mA.
Voltage supply : +/- 6 V AC (+/-3 %)
(apr. 66 Hz
short-circuit-proof
n Analog input
Measuring cycle : 100ms
Number : 1 Resolution : 24 Bit
Current : raise ...20 mA impressed Load : R (load cell) = min. 80 ohms
Raise : 0... 20 mA Cable length : max. 30 % voltage drop,
Load : 500 ohms max. 500 m
Reference : 0 V internal, Measuring range : -20mV....+50mV
galvanically non isolated with VLW:
Resolution : 10 bits +/- 1/2 d -1.6mV...min. 32mV
Acuracy : <0.4% over entire
temperature range

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Technical Data Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 26 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

n Serial interface for service PC

Number : 1
Type : RS232; RS422 or RS 485
max. 19200 baud
Data format : 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd
parity changeable to even or
no
Isolation : galvanically non-isolated
Connectors : Phoenix MSTB, contact
spacing 3.5 mm, max. 1.5
mm2 or 9-pole D-Sub HD20

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Technical Data
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 27
VBW INTECONT PLUS

This page left intentionally blank.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Technical Data Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 28 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

6. Characteristics

n Power failure n Signal lamps (top down)

Scale data, calibration values, counter readings VOLTAGE OK (green)


and pulses pending remain stored after power PROCESSOR OK (green)
failure for an unlimited period of time. The internal ALARM (red)
clock continues running for approx. 5 days. MIN (red) MIN feed rate value
MAX (red) MAX feed rate value

n Dialog language
for error messages, operation, and service n Event messages
programs.
Events and faults are displayed in form of an
Select: DEUTSCH alphanumeric code. Call clear text of consecutive
ENGLISH events via keyboard.
FRANCAIS Events are organized into Alarms and Warnings,
ESPANOL with and without acknowledgement. Alarms stop
ITALIANO scale; warnings dont.
All alarms are additionally reported via relay
output.
n Units (selectable)
n Operating philosophy
SI units : kg , kg/h
t , t/h Operator prompting through multi-level menus.
m , cm Important configuration and calibration functions
are protected by password.
NON-SI units: lb , lb/h
t , t/h
f , inch n Belt speed
(see Parameter List) For simple applications, speed measurement can
be omitted.

n Start/Stop totalizing counter


n Zero setting
Select using Parameter B06.
Zero setting can be performed
n Displays 1- manually via keyboard
2- automatically, if belt is empty.
Upper display: Totalizing counter 1
Lower display: Totalizing counters 2 and 3 The maximum admissible zero setting elevation is
Feed rate absolute monitored.
Feed rate relative
Belt speed
Belt load absolute
Belt load relative
Batch data

Select for lower display using cursor keys.


0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Characteristics
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 29
VBW INTECONT PLUS

n Taring n MIN/MAX messages and outputs

Designed to zero the basic tare load, the taring 2 separately selectable limit values for monitoring
program on principle has the same function as the of signal lamps and relay outputs.
zero setting program. However, tare elevation is Any event can be reported by message.
not monitored, and the call is protected by
password. MIN/MAX for
(1) Feed rate
(2) Belt load
n Automatic belt influence compensation (BIC) (3) Belt speed
Using an additional belt circuit sensor and a metal
Switching threshold, relay outputs and event class
belt mark, the dynamic zero point influence of the
can be defined individually for all 6 possibilities.
conveyor belt can be compensated during
operation (with and without material). n Display filter

This considerably increases the belt weighers Define individually for feed rate, belt load and belt
short-term accuracy. speed.

n Measurement at the point of discharge (CPD)


n Maintenance hints
A special speed-dependent delay element shifts
the point of measurement to the material Display event on screen.
discharge point where the material amount
discharged is acquired. (1) Voltage ON-time

(2) Scale ON-time


n Belt drift display
(3) Zero setting required
For prerequisites, see BIC.
n Statistic Process Control (SPC)
n Batching mode
Mean values, variances, maximum value storage,
(1) Without clearance of conveyor belt. zero settings tables, etc. are available in form of
Controlled is the belt drive motor. service values.

(2) With clearance of conveyor belt.


Controlled is the material prefeeder. n Adaptions
Cut-off point and start of dribble feed can be The electrical system needs not be redesigned,
adapted automatically in either case. adapted, etc.

n Zero drop out

Used to suppress totalization upon measurements


around zero, for counter to stop while belt is being
unloaded.
Deselect function, if not desired.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Characteristics Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 30 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

n Calibration n Digital Outputs

Calibration as such is not necessary.


Number Name Default Value
All you have to do is enter some constructional
data on load cells, speed transducer, belt Q04 DO I-MIN DO4
inclination, etc. INTECONT uses these data to Q05 DO I-MAX DO2
compute all requisite display normalizations. Q01 DO ALARM DO3
Check, or recalibration, can be effected in two Q02 DO START Feeder
ways: Q03 DO START Scale DO1
Q11 DO Full Feed
Q12 DO Dribble Feed
a) Using material N15 DO Belt Skew
N16 DO Belt Drift
Enter check result into INTECONT, and N17 DO Belt Slip
measuring result will be corrected. Q06 DO Q-MIN
Q07 DO Q-MAX
b) Using check weight Q08 DO v-MIN
Q09 DO v-MAX
A special check program lets you check Q10 DO Batch Active
normalization, or if certain technical data are Q13 DOKeyboard Mode
not exactly known (lever ratio, belt inclination, B11 DO Pulse Counter
etc.), correct them.

In subsequent operation, this program can be


used to detect mechanical changes, e.g. platform
distorsion after settling of foundation.

n Digital inputs

Number Name Default Value


P03 DI Ackn. Events DI1
P01 Release DI3
B06 START Source (OP)
P02 DI Abort Batch
N04 Sensor Source DI6
B03 Tacho Source DI7
P04 DI Start
P05 DI Zero Set
N18 Freeze BIC
P06 DI Ext. Event

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Characteristics
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 31
VBW INTECONT PLUS

This page left intentionally blank

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Characteristics Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 32 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

7 Setting Programs

Function Distributor Programming and Calibrating functions lead to further


menus you can move through using cursor keys.

The function distributor lets you access all setting B= If batching mode is selected, additional
programs. functions can be accessed in main distributor.

G Call function distributor.


If no event is available, function selected last Abort Batch
is displayed. Deselect Batch
Batch Number
f Start function. Print Batch
Make-up
Next = W/Belt Empty
N Return to normal displays, or
abort function.
S= Calibrating functions protected by password.
Prompt is output after call of function only

E= An event is available.
F u n ctions
Displa y Result s
Z= Activated via parameter.

Moving through function distributor has no effect on


weighing functions.
Move through function distributor.

TU
Display Results E
Display Check
START/STOP Feeder Z
Service Values
Batch Number B
Print Counter Readings
>0< Zero Set
START/STOP Keyboard Mode
START/STOP EasyServe
Programming
Calibration Functions S

Read Parameters
Enter Parameters S
Load Default Par. S
Print Parameters
Print Status Report

START/STOP Simulation
Tare S
Weight Check S
0837 Imp/Belt Circuit S
Set Time S

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Setting Programs
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 33
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Calibrating Functions Belt Circuit LB

There are 3 setting programs designed to ease initial Call setting program LB: IMP/BELT only
calibration and recalibration. (1) upon initial calibration
(1) Pulses/Belt Circuit LB (2) after mounting new belt or considerably varying
(2) Taring TW belt tension
(3) Weight Check CW (3) after having changed parameter B 04
Charact.Val. vs or B 05 Nominal Speed (in
Upon initial calibration, perform functions in the above case of scales with and without speed
order of sequence. measurement).
All functions can be reached using the CALIBRATION
function and are protected from unauthorized use by Program acquires the number of speed transducer
password. pulses for one belt circuit and uses the number of
pulses as belt circuit code for the following programs:
During program run until acknowledgement (a) Manual or automatic zero setting
(1) no totalization takes place (b) Taring TW
(2) analog outputs are set to offset values (c) Weight Check CW
(3) no event messages are suppressed
(4) all BIC functions are cut off. Upon initial calibration, first call setting program LB.
This also applies to scales without speed
The operating sequence is the same with all measurement.
programs.

G Call function distributor. Prerequisites : (1) Before calling program, measure


time of one belt circuit with
TUf Scroll CALIBRATION FUNCTIONS maximum possible accuracy and
into lower display field and enter into Parameter C 02.
acknowledge. (2) Deselect batching mode.
(3) Ensure conveyor belt is running.
B7f Enter password 07734.
Sequence:
Display shows a setting program, e.g. TW: Tare. Gf Function distributor, calibrating
functions, password
(see Calibrating Functions)
TU Scroll LB: Imp/Belt
Calibrating Functions into lower display field.
S5 TW. Tare
f Start.
N Abort at any time.

Start setting program.


Setting programs do not control belt drive and
N Return to normal displays. prefeeder.
For approx. 2 min., Calibration menu can be If any condition is not met, setting program aborts
f recalled without password input. and a corresponding message is output.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Setting Programs Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 34 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Program running: Error message : If sensor is improperly recognized


(sensor pulses measured do not
correspond to parameter setting),
message Sensor Error is output
and setting program aborts. For
>. LB : 5.6 s
1500 Imp troubleshooting, see
Commissioning/Belt Run
Monitoring item.

Upper display : residual run time in seconds


Tare TW
Lower display : added speed transducer pulses

The taring program acquires the belt weighers zero


Program complete: point error over one or multiple integer belt circuits
and uses value to correct current measuring result in
normal mode.
On principle, taring program is identical with zero set-
ting program.
>. LB: v 0.095 m/s
451251 I/B
Tare : acquire basic tare (weight of
mechanical system, conveyor belt,
etc.) upon commissioning, service
and maintenance.

Set to zero : acquire zero point deviation during


Upper display : belt speed mean value over total run operation, e.g. contamination.
time
Lower display : Pulses/belt circuit total Unlike the zero setting program, the correction
amount of the taring program is unlimited.
After taring, the admissible correction amount of the
zeroing program relates to the new reference value.
f Accept result and enter into Prerequisites : (1) Conveyor belt totally unloaded.
Parameter D 06. Control prefeeder using the
N Reject result. START/STOP Feeder function.
(2) Clean mechanical scale system
in weighing area.
The sequence is the same if no speed measurement Normal deposits immediately
is provided. recurring during operation need
not be removed.
Special Messages: (3) Deselect batching mode.
(1) START if belt is not running (4) Ensure conveyor belt is running.
(2) ABORTED Corresponding hint is output
automatically.
Attention!

If a belt circuit sensor is present (N03 = YES), Sequence:


program sequence slightly differs.
Running Gf Function distributor, calibrating
message : E-PROG active (lower display) functions, password
(see Calibrating Functions)
Complete
message : ... - I/B
value flickers upon every belt circuit. TU Scroll TW: Tare
0837 Operation : as described above function into lower display field.

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Setting Programs
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 35
VBW INTECONT PLUS

f Start function. Weight Check CW


N Abort function at any time.
This program lets you check the INTECONT
measuring range.
Program running: Load weighing platform with a known check weight
and acquire platform load mean value over one or
multiple integer belt circuits.
TW: 9 0. 2 % INTECONT compares the result with defined setpoint
Tare 5 2. 3 5
and displays value. Automatic correction does not
take place.
Prerequisites : (1) Tare or zero set
(2) Enter check weight into
Parameter C 08.
Upper display : residual run time in % of total run time Select check weight between
Lower display : continuously meaned tare in % of 30...100 % of nominal platform
nominal belt load load Q0.

Program complete: Q0 = q0 * Leff


q0 = nominal belt load
Parameter D 01
>. Dev. 2.45 %
Tare 53.20 Leff = eff. platform length
Parameter C 05

(3) Apply check weight in proper


location.
(4) Select batching mode.
Upper display : deviation of tare value from previous (5) Start conveyor belt.
taring result Corresponding hint is output
in % of nominal belt load automatically.
dev = + : tare has increased
dev = - : tare has decreased Sequence:
Lower display : mean value of total tare
in % of nominal belt load Gf Function distributor, calibrating
functions, password
f Accept taring result and enter into (see Calibrating Functions).
Parameter D 04.
Set tare correction (D05) to zero.
TU Scroll CW: Weight Check
N Reject result, i.e. scale is not tared. function into lower display field.

Special Messages: f Start function.


(1) START if belt is not running
(2) ABORTED
N Abort function at any time.
Note:
(1) Related to nominal belt load, tare value can
exceed 100%.
(2) If deviation (dev) exceeds 20%, check scale for
mechanical faults, e.g. jammed material
particles.

(3) If BIC is active (M05 = YES), BIC tare vectors 0837


are initialized along with taring program.

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Setting Programs Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 36 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Program running: Evaluating Result:


Error < 1 % : KOR = 0.99...1.01
Scale OK, no further action required.

Error < 5 % : KOR = 0.95...1.05


>. CW: 51,4 %
Set / Act 0,9842 Enter KOR value into Parameter D
02.
This make good sense only if
parameter has not yet considered
result of check using material.
Upper display : residual run time in % of total run time
Lower display : continuously meaned SET/ACT Error > 5 % : KOR < 0.95, or KOR > 1.05
measuring result Multi-percent deviations suggest
faulty data input (e.g. belt incination,
lever arms not exactly known), and/or
mechanical faults (misalignment,
Program complete: distorsions).

Check does not consider Parameter D 02 Range


>. CW: 1200,34 kg
Correction, so that check program will indicate
COR 0,99915 same error quotient KOR after check.

Upper display : Fictitious material amount fed over


run time *.
Lower display : mean value KOR of SET/ACT over
total run time

fN Exit program.
Since result is not
AUTOMATICALLY ACQUIRED,
both keys are equivalent.

Special Messages:
(1) START if belt is not running
(2) ABORTED (irrelevant)

* Lets you check scale zero point without check


weight.
Display format: xxxxxxx,yy kg
0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Setting Programs
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 37
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Set Time Simulation Mode

Unlike the other programs, date and time can be The Simulation Mode lets you check all scale
changed in START and STOP states of scale and functions without material at the time of
read off under SERVICE VALUES. commissioning.
During simulation, scale is cannot operate in normal
Gf Function distributor, Calibrating mode.
functions, password
(see Calibrating Functions). Gf Function distributor, Calibration
functions, password (see
Calibration Functions).
TU Scroll Set Time function into lower
display field. TU Scroll START Simulation into lower
display field.
f Call menu.
f Start program.
N Abort at any time.

Display : Event message S7


033 Year, e.g. 03
Enter month, day, hour, minute, In upper line, the = symbol
second. flashes.

f Acknowledge every input. Function can be cut off in the same way (STOP
As soon as seconds are Simulation).
acknowledged, new date is stored,
and complete date is briefly
displayed.
Features:
O Delete digit entered last
1. All operating functions can be performed.

2. Feed rate actual value is set to nominal rate.

After power failure, time remains stored for min. 5 3. Belt load and speed measurement are active.
days.
4, All control inputs/outputs operate as usually.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Setting Programs Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 38 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

8 Service Values

The Service table includes detailed system 6) Input switching condition


information.
Call does not affect weighing functions. I+ : DI = 1 1 1 1 1 + 0

GT 1" = contact closed


0" = contact open
f Call SERVICE VALUES function and
Inputs 4 + 5 on option card
activate.
N = no option card
TU Move through service values.
Inputs 6 + 7 designed as Namur inputs
(belt sensor, tacho)
N Return to normal displays.
+ short circuit; - cable breakage;
1" = sensor covered; 0" = sensor free
Displays:
7) EL = 22 h
1) VBW 20600-01 2482 Version number
Voltage ON-time
2) HW = 1 Hardware version
Monitored: Parameter K 01, Message S4
3) Option card: 0 (not available)
8) ED : >0 = 95 min
1 (available)
Scale ON-time after last taring, or last manual or
automatic zero set.
O Z1 = 1500100 kg
Opt..Card : 1

Prerequisite : Totalization ON, conveyor belt


may be stopped.
Monitored : Parameter H 07, Message C7

9) ED = 19 h
4) Date and time
Scale and conveyor belt ON-times
5) Relay outputs switching condition

I + DO = 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Prerequisite : Totalization ON
Monitored : Parameter K 03, Message S3
1" = contact closed
0" = contact open
10) Tacho = 96.6 Hz
Outputs 4-8 on option card
N = no option card
Speed transducer input frequency
Select frequency between 0.4...3000 Hz.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Service Values
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 39
VBW INTECONT PLUS

11) aw = 30.988 % 17) Belt Drift tr = 0.12 cm

Load on load cells related to total of load cells The arrows indicate the direction of drift.
rated capacity.
If value exceeds 100 %, load cells are
overloaded.
From 110 % onward, message H4 :

L/C Input > MAX is output.

12) vap = 0.883168 mV/V

Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value Prerequisite: see Slip


delayed for point of material discharge (CPD Monitored : Parameters N09-N12, messages
active). C3 and C4

13) bic = 2.34001 mV/V 18) Pulses of sensor area Imp.S. = 386

Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value Measured pulses of sensor area. If belt sensor is
with active BIC (Belt Influence Compensation) properly located, the following result is expected:

Imp.S. = 0.5 * sensor length * 0.01 * charact. value vs


14) L/C = 1.383257 mV/V

Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value Prerequisite: see Slip


(Gross).
19) Mean value Imitt = 22.27 %
Acquired before belt influence compensation and
delay for point of discharge. Feed rate mean value related to nominal feed
rate

Filter : Exponential, Parameter K 06


15) R_L/C = 300 ohms Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin
Initialization : Zero at power ON
Load cell resistance value
20) Variance var = 0.02 %
16) Slip s = 0.25 %
Feed rate variance related to nominal feed rate
Variation in belt length in % of total belt length square.
(Parameter D 06).
Filter : Exponential, Parameter K 06
Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin
Prerequisite: Belt sensor active (N03), sensor Initialization : Zero at power ON
area on conveyor belt (N04).
Monitored : Parameter N13, message C8

The variance indicates belt load instability.


Higher values suggest poor discharge behaviour
of material.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Service Values Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 40 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

21) Max. belt load QMAX = 57 % 26) ZE = 53

Maximum belt load during preselected SPC time Pulses output across pulse output of external
related to nominal belt load. totalizing counter, counted from command Reset
Counter 1
Time : SPC time, Parameter K 05
Evaluation : SPC time continuously floating
Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin 27) ZO = 1
Initialization : Zero at power ON
Max. display : 255 % Pulses pending.
If value constantly exceeds zero, pulse frequency
22) No load percentage TQ < MIN = 23 % surpasses 10 Hz.
Increase smallest display digit of Counter 1
Total time during which belt load is below Qmin (Parameter B 07).
(F 05), related to SPC time, Parameter K 05
28) AI = 12.54 mA
Evaluation : SPC time continuously floating
Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin Analog input input current
Initialization : with Q = Qmin at power ON
29) CS = 10851

Check sum of scale software

30) CS_b = 10851

Check sum recomputed in cycles. If value


CS_b differs from CS, a serious fault is
present. Contact the Schenck Service.

31) BIC-N = 27

Counter reading indicating how often BIC sensor


has been recognized
23) Last taring T (date) 23.51 %
32) BIC-E = 5
Date and total tare related to nominal belt load
Counter reading indicating faulty BIC circuits not
Prerequisites : Correct zero point using taring entered into tare vectors
program or manual/automatic
zero setting function.
Manual changes of correction
parameters are not recorded. 33) ES-Version = 11

Displayed are the 5 last taring or zeroing Current EasyServe Version


operations.

24) AO1 = 4.15 mA

Analog output 1 output current

25) AO2 = 10.00 mA

Analog output 2 output current


0837 (on option card)

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Service Values
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 41
VBW INTECONT PLUS

This page left intentionally blank

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Service Values Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 42 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

9. Parameterization

General Information There are two types of parameter:


Selection parameters Let you select from various
Parameters are variable characteristics or data used options, e.g.
to match the INTECONT to the application. WARNING, ALARM.

Display units and format Numeric parameters Enter numeric value, e.g.
Limit values nominal feed rate.
Nominal and calibration data, etc.

Some parameters can be selected in accordance with


the requirements (e.g. display formats), others have to Call Parameter Menu
be taken from Spec Sheets supplied.
During parameter input, all functions are maintained. G Call function distributor.
However, during operation, only parameters with no
influence on measurement, e.g. display filter, should TUf Scroll PROGRAMMING function
be changed. into lower display field and
acknowledge.
Default Parameters: TUf Select ENTER PAR. function.
All parameter are preset with default values. These Bf Enter password 07734.
are proven suggestions and can normally be used as
defined.

The default values can be loaded using sub-function


Load Default Parameters.
Dialog Behaviour
Block: A
Identification

The parameters are organized into function blocks A,


B, ... and, within a block, described by

name Display shows title of first parameter block.


number 1, 2, 3 ..
and
value. N Return to normal displays.
For approx. 2 minutes, parameter
Values differing from default are identified by a * menu can be recalled without
before the block letter. password input.

Nominal Feed Rate


B02 1000.0 kg/h

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 43
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Preselect Parameters Enter Parameters

P Prepare input.
TU Selection parameters:
Value flashes.
Rated Data
Block: B Scroll desired value into lower
display field.
46 Go to the left (4) or to the right (6),
see Hardware Configuration.
1. Block letter B9 Numeric parameters:
Feature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Enter value using keypad.

TU Move through blocks A, B ..., up and f Acknowledge input.


down. Next parameter is displayed.
Block letter flashes. O Delete digits.
f Select block. N Abort input.
Parameter selected last is
displayed.
OFF key 0 is active always; ON key I, only after
completed parameter input.

2. Parameter number

Nominal Feed Rate


B02 10000.0 kg/h

TU Move through parameter numbers


within a block.
Parameter number flashes.
f Move through parameter numbers
independent of block (UP only).

NN Return to block titles.


Return to normal mode.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 44 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Hardware Configuration Load Default Parameter

Lets you load the default settings.


When parameterizing the hardware used, the source Function is protected by password and YES/NO
determines whether unit, channel and level must be prompt.
indicated, or not. The table below will assist you in
selecting the hardware configuration: Attention!
All variable parameters and calibration values are
Source Unit Channel Level reset.
FB

OP
G Call PROGRAMMING function and
DEFAULT PARAMETERS.
v B1 YES =1 f Acknowledge
NO =0 selection.
-
Power Failure
DI I+ DI1-DI7 HI, LO
Parameters remain stored for an unlimited period of
DO I+ DO1-DO8 HI, LO time.

AI I+

As you can see, with Fieldbus [FB", Control Unit


(OP), Speed (v) and Not Assigned (-)] no additional
information is required.
Digital Inputs (DI) and Digital Outputs (DO) require
unit, channel and level to be indicated.
With Analog Input (AI), the unit is firmly set to I+.

Sample:

Parameter B06 START Source determines from


where the scale is started.

Description Source
B06 START Source OP
Alternatives FB, DI, v

On standard, the scale is started from INTECONT


keyboard (OP).
Alternatively, fieldbus, digital input (DI) or speed (v)
can be selected. If DI is the desired source,
additionally indicate channel and level (see Hardware
Configuration table); the unit is firmly set to I+.

4 Keys 4 (go to the left) and 6 (go to


the right), let you shift between
source, channel and level.
6
0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 45
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Parameters Overview D 05 Tare Correction T 0,00 kg/m


D 06 Belt Circuit Char 1000 000 I/B

This list applies to software: VBW 20600-08 Block E Analog Output

Block A Dialog Behaviour E 01 Elevation AO1 I


E 02 Elevation AO1 4,00 mA
A 01 Language ENGLISH E 03 Limit Value AO1 20,00 mA
A 02 Units SI E 04 Source AO2 Q
A 03 Password 07734 or 7734) E 05 Elevation AO2 4.00 mA
A 04 2.Password 2889 E 06 Limit Value AO2 20.00 mA
A 05 Feeder ON/OFF active
A 06 Keyb. Mode ON/OFF active Block F Limit Values
A 07 Batch ON/OFF active
A 08 >0: Zero ON/OF active F 01 Value for I-MIN 5,0 %I
A 09 EasyServe ON/OFF active F 02 Event Class I-MIN WARNING 2
A 10 Totalizer1 ON/OFF active F 03 Value for I-MAX 120,0 %I
A 11 Totalizer2 ON/OFF active F 04 Event Class I-MAX WARNING 2
F 05 Value for Q-MIN 20,0 %Q
F 06 Event Class Q-MIN WARNING 2
Block B Rated Data F 07 Value for Q-MAX 120,0 %Q
F 08 Event Class Q-MAX WARNING 2
B 01 Feed Rate Unit - t/h F 09 Value for V-MIN 5,0 %V
B 02 Nominal Feed Rate 400,0000 t/h F 10 Event Class V-MIN WARNING 2
B 03 Tacho Source DI I+, DI7 HI F 11 Value for V-MAX 120,0 %V
B 04 vs Charact. Value 50.26 I/m F 12 Event Class V-MAX WARNING 2
B 05 Nominal Speed 1,0000 m/s
B 06 START Source OP
B 07 FMZ1 Unit t Block G Filter Setting
B 08 FMZ1 Pulse Dur. 0 ms
B 09 FMZ2 Unit t G 01 I Display 3,0 s
B 10 FMZ3 Unit t G 02 I Analog Output 3,0 s
B11 DO Pulse Counter G 03 Q Display 3,0 s
B12 Pulse Weighting 0.0 kg G 04 V Display 3,0 s
G 05 L/C Filter 1,0 s
G 06 Afterfl. Time 3,0 s
Block C Calibrating Data

C 01 Belt Circuit No. 1.00 Block H AUTO Zero Set


C 02 Belt Circuit Time 30.0 s
C 03 L/C Charac. Value 2,8500 mV/V H 01 AUTO Zero Active NO
C 04 L/C Rated Cap. 220,000 kg H 02 Limit Value Diff. 0,50 %Q
C 05 Eff. Platf. Length 1,000 m H 03 Mean Limit Value 1,00 %Q
C 06 Lever Ratio 1,0000 H 04 Zero Set Limit 5,00 %Q
C 07 Angle a 0.0 degrees H 05 Tare Corr. > MAX WARNING 1
C 08 Check Weight 50,000 kg H 06 Zero Set Time 4h
H 07 Time Elapsed IGNORE
H 08 Print Result NO
Block D Calibrat. Results H 09 ZDO Active NO
H 10 ZDO Limit 1,00 %Q
D 01 Nominal Belt Load 111,11 kg/m H 11 Zero Set Diff. 5,0 %
D 02 Span Correction 1,0000 H 12 Tare Diff. >MAX WARNING 2
D 03 Total Tare 0,00 kg/m
0837
D 04 Basic Tare N 0,00 kg/m

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 46 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block I Batch Mode L 09 Physics RS 485


L 10 Baud Rate 9600
I 01 Batch Dribble FD 100,000 kg L 11 Format Data 8-E-1
I 02 Batch End 0,000 kg L 12 Adresse 16
I 03 Adaption Fact. 1,0 L 13 FLOAT-Format IEEE
I 04 Batch Tolerance + 1,0 % L 14 Address 63
I 05 Batch Tolerance - 1,0 % L 15 Baud Rate 125K
I 06 Out of Tolerance WARNING 1 L 17 S5 Physics RS422
I 07 Belt Empty NO L 22 Hardware VxB020
I 08 Batch > Setp. IGNORE
I 09 Batch Source OP

Block J Printer Setting Block M Feeder Control

J 01 Baud Rate 9600 M 01 Feeder Active NO


J 02 AUTO Print NO M 02 Setting Time 0,0 s
J 03 Print Subtotal Error M 03 Feed Distance 0,00 m
J 04 Reset Print FMZ 1 NO M 04 Motor STOP aft. ST NO
J 05 Reset Print FMZ 2 NO M 05 Change-over FF/DF YES
J 06 Print Page Length 72 lines
J 07 Batch Setp.Line 6
J 08 Batch Setp.Col. 8 Block N Scale Monitoring
J 09 Batch Act.Line 7
J 10 Batch Act.Col. 8 N 01 CPD Active NO
J 11 FMZ 1 Line 8 N 02 Platf.Dis.Length 0,00 %LB
J 12 FMZ 1 Column 8 N 03 Belt Sensor Active NO
J 13 FMZ 2 Line 9 N 04 Source Sensor DI6
J 14 FMZ 2 Column 8 N 05 BIC Active NO
J 15 Date/Time Line 4 N 06 Sensor Length 8.20cm
J 16 Date/Time Column 8 N 07 Sensor Width 12.00 cm
J 17 Event Line 12 N 08 Sensor Offset 0.00 cm
J 18 Event Column 8 N 09 Belt Drift 3.00 cm
J 19 Set Line to Zero 10 N 10 Belt Drift Event W1 (C04)
J 20 Set Column to Zero 8 N 11 Belt Skew 4.00cm
J 21 Line Number 3 N 12 Belt Skew Event A (C03)
J 22 Column Number 8 N 13 Slip Limit 2.00 %LB
N 14 Slip Event W1 (C08)
Block K Maintenance Int. N 15 DO Belt Drift
N 16 DO Belt Skew
K 01 Maintenance Elec. 3000 hours N 17 DO Slip
K 02 Event Maint. EL. WARNING 1 N 18 Freeze BIC
K 03 Maint. STR-Meter 3000 hours
K 04 Event Maint. Run. WARNING 1
K 05 SPC Time 8 hrs Block O Events
K 06 SPC Filter 1,00 hour
BLOCK L Comm. Fieldbus O 01 Power Failure A (E01)
O 02 Memory Error A (S01)
L 01 Protocol Type NO O 03 Tacho Input A (C02)
L 02 Host timeout 5s O 04 Namur Err. Tacho A (E02)
L 03 Comm.-Error Host ALARM (S 09) O 05 Namur Err Belt W1 (E03)
L 04 Word sequence I:std/L:std O 06 L/C Input A (C01)
L 05 Byte sequence Low-High O 07 No Release W1 (S02)
L 06 Configuration FIXED O 08 L/C Input > MAX A (H04)
0837 L 07 Address 1 O 09 L/C Input < MIN A (L04)
L 08 Resolution 4096

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 47
VBW INTECONT PLUS

O10 Simualtion Active W2 (S07) Block U: Ethernet


O11 Error Ext. Event A (E06)
U 01 IP-Address 1 192
U 02 IP-Address 2 168
Block P Digital Inputs U 03 IP-Address 3 240
U 04 IP-Address 4 1
P 01 Release DI I+ DI 3 HI U 05 Net Mask 1 255
P 02 Stop Batch U 06 Net Mask 2 255
P 03 Ackn. Events DI I+DI1 HI U 07 Net Mask 3 255
P 04 DI Start U 08 Net Mask 4 0
P 05 DI Setting to zero U 09 Gatway 1 192
P 06 DI Ext. Event U 10 Gatway 2 168
U 11 Gatway 3 240
Block Q Digital Outputs U 12 Gatway 4 0

Q 01 DO Alarm DO I+ D03 LO
Q 02 DO Prefeeder ON
Q 03 DO Feeder ON DO I+ D01 HI BLOCK V: Fixmode Parameter
Q 04 DO I-MIN DO I+ DO4 LO
Q 05 DO I-MAX DO I+ DO2 LO V 01 ID Preset Value 1 320
Q 06 DO Q-MIN V 02 ID Preset Value 2 352
Q 07 DO Q-MAX V 03 ID Preset Value 3 384
Q 08 DO v-MIN V 04 ID Preset Value 4 596
Q 09 v-MAX V 05 ID Preset Value 5 594
Q 10 DO Batch Active V 06 ID Preset Value 6 598
Q 11 DO Full Feed V 07 ID Preset Value 7 0
Q 12 DO Dribble Feed V 08 ID Preset Value 8 0
Q 13 DO Keyboard Mode V 09 ID Read Value 1 752
V 10 ID Read Value 2 784
V 11 ID Read Value 3 1552
Block R Comm. EasyServe V 12 ID Read Value 4 1872
V 13 ID Read Value 5 1874
R 01 Station Address 1 V 14 ID Read Value 6 1880
R 02 Physics RS 232 V 15 ID Read Value 7 1884
R 03 EasyServe Baudr. 19200 V 16 ID Read Value 8 1876
R 04 Format Data 8-0-1
R 05 Connection serial
R 06 MODBUS Idle Time 4ms

Block S: Secondary display DLZ

S01 DLZ active No


S02 Baud rate 9600
S02 Data format 8 bit NO
S04 Physics RS232

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 48 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block A : Dialog Behaviour

A 01 Language Note:

Range: DEUTSCH Default: DEUTSCH If you forget your password, you have to change your
ENGLISH* password with EasyServe or report the shown value of
AMERICAN ENG* the parameter A03 to Schenck Service to find out the
FRANCAIS appropriate password
ESPANOL
ITALIANO
Selection applies to all displays, error messages and
parameters.
A 04 Second password
* identical
Range: 1000 - 9999 Default: 2889

The password for using a specific system. This


password allows you to protect the basic functions in
A 02 Units the function distributor (see above). It does not allow
access to parameters or adjustment functions. The
Range: SI Default: SI changed password is also shown encoded. The
NON-SI default value 2889 generates the return display
14389.

Convert displays and parameter inputs from SI units Note: If you forget the second password, you can
into American units. enter a new password in the A04 parameter using the
standard password

American Units SI Units Conversion *


lb kg 1 lb = 0.453593 kg
A 05 Feeder ON/OFF
t t 1 t = 0.907185 t = 2000 lb
f m 1 f = 0.3048 m Range: active Default: active
inch cm 1 inch = 2.54 cm
not active
Password
* also applicable to compound units, e.g. kg/hr 2. Password
Confirm
You can use this parameter to control access to the
basic functions of ON/OFF prefeeder.
A 03 Password You have the options below::
Range: 1000 - 9999 Default: 07734 o 7734
active: Access is always allowed.
The password that secures the INTECONT keyboard not active: Access is never allowed. This
access to parameters and adjustment functions function is not visible in the
can now be changed. The changed password is distributor.
shown encoded in the parameter dialog and
EasyServe. The default value 07734 (or 7734) Password: Access is available with the
generates the return display 26574 (this process is standard password (A03).
identical to DISOCONT).
Second
Password: Access is available with the new
0837
second password (A04)..

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 49
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Confirm: Access has to be confirmed again


for security reasons. A 09 EasyServe ON/OFF
Range: active Default: active
Note: The prefeeder also has to be activated with
not active
parameter M01.
Password
2. Password
A 06 Keyb. Mode ON/OFF Confirm

Range: active Default: active


not active You can use this parameter to control access to the
Password basic functions of EasyServe activate/deactivate.
2. Password The range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.
Confirm

You can use this parameter to control access to the


basic functions of keyboard ON/OFF mode. The
range of values is identical to the A05 parameter. A 10 Totalizer1 ON/OFF
Range: active Default: active
not active
Password
A 07 Batch ON/OFF 2. Password
Confirm
Range: active Default: active
not active
Password You can use this parameter to control deleting counter
2. Password 2. The range of values is identical to the A05
Confirm parameter.

You can use this parameter to control access to the A 11 Totalizer2 ON/OFF
basic functions of batch preselect/deselect. The
Range: active Default: active
range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.
not active
Password
A 08 >0: Zero ON/OF 2. Password
Confirm
Range: active Default: active You can use this parameter to control deleting counter
not active 2. The range of values is identical to the A05
Password parameter.
2. Password
Confirm

You can use this parameter to control access to the


basic function of >0: zero setting. The range of
values is identical to the A05 parameter.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 50 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block B : Rated Data

B 01 Feed Rate Unit B 05 Nominal Speed


Range: - - - - - - t/h Default: - - - - - - t/h Range: 0,0100...10,000 m/s Default: 1,0000 m/s
- - - - . - t/h
- - - . - - t/h Limit value reference.
- - . - - - t/h If BIC or CPD (Parameter Block N) are used, value
- - - - - - kg/h should be accurate to some percent.
- - - - . - kg/h If scales operate without speed measurement, B 05
- - -. - - kg/h determines the accuracy.
- -.- - - kg/h
Determine feed rate display format.

B 06 START Source

B 02 Nominal Feed Rate Range: OP Default: OP


FB
Range: 0,0020...99999,9 t/h Default: 400,0000 t/h DI
v
Reference for limit values and service displays

To start/stop totalization, there is no single solution:


OP : from INTECONT keyboard
FB : via fieldbus interface
B 03 Tacho Source DI : using digital input. Default value is DI2. You
Range: DI Default: DI I+ DI7 HI can also use any other free digital input.
Digital input operates edge-controlled, i.e. if
scale fails after Alarm, remove START signal
and re-apply.
Select - to stop belt speed measurement. v : If you select belt speed v, totalization starts at
Computation uses nominal speed B 05. v>v-min (Parameter F09) and stops at
v<v-min.

B 04 vs Charact. Val.
Range: 10,00...100 000,0 I/m Default:
50,26 I/m

Number of speed transducer pulses per belt meter.


Product B 04 * B 05 must range between 0.5...2500
Hz of speed input.

Special case:B 03 = NO
Do not change characteristic value vs; this
would change the run time of your setting
programs.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 51
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Note:
If you select v, no batching is possible.

Dialog function Keyboard Mode lets you change over


from selected source to keyboard, and vice versa.

Note

G06 defines the totalizing counters tracking time.


If Parameter P01 Release is set to - -", no release is
required.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 52 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

B 07 FMZ 1 Unit B 09 FMZ 2 Unit


Range: ------- t Default: - - - - - - - t same as B08, however, for Counter 2
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
- - - - - - t *10
----- t *100
B 10 FMZ 3 Unit
- - - - - - - kg same as B08, however, for Counter 3
- - - - - . - kg
- - - - . - - kg
- - - . - - - kg

B11 DO Pulse Counter


Lets you determine the display format for Counter 1,
all batch values and pulse weighting. Range: Default:
If no external counter is present, set Parameter B08 to DO
0. The impulse output of totalizing counter 1 can now
also be output via a digital output. The impulse output
of INTECONT on plug X6, pins 8-11 is still used with
default value and the configured output is used
B 08 FMZ 1 Pulse Dur. instead with the alternative DO.
The impulse duration is still determined with the B08
Range: 0....1000 ms Default: 0 ms parameter. Readings less than 10 ms block the output
total and readings up to 1 second are set to 1 second
Lets you determine output pulse length of external
when a digital output is used.
totalizing counter. Pulse weighting corresponds to the
smallest display digit of Counter 1
(Parameter B07).

B08 < 10 ms : Pulse output is disabled. B 12 Pulse Weighting


All pulses not yet output still are
deleted. Range: 0.00 100000.00 kg Default: 0.00 kg

At nominal feed rate the output frequency is: The weighting of an output impulse on the impulse
output of totalizing counter 1 can now be set to be
freely selected. The weighting of an impulse
corresponds to the smallest possible digit of counter 1
with default value 0.00 (refer to parameter B07).

PNENN = nominal feed rate in kg/h or t/h

Zmin = smallest display digit of Counter 1


(B 07) in kg or t

Select Zmin (B07) so that f does not exceed


10 Hz.
In addition, pulse duration B08 must be smaller than
1/f.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 53
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Block C : Calibrating Data

C 01 Belt Circuit No. C 06 Lever Ratio


Range: 1...100 Default: 1,00 Range: 0,0100...2,0000 Default: 1,0000

lets you determine the run time of the Zero Setting, Lever ratio of force transducing weighed idler of
Taring and Weight Check setting programs. platform and load cell.

Does not apply to AUTO Zero Set.

Q = platform load
C 02 Belt Circuit Time F = load on load cell

Range: 1,0...9999,0 s Default: 30,0 s With weighing modules with leaf spring parallel
guidance, lever ratio is always 1.
lets you determine the measuring time for the
Imp/Belt Circuit calibration program. C 07 Angle a
Normally, the time is selected for one belt circuit.
Range: 0,0...60,00 degrees Default: 0,00 degrees

Angle of longitudinal scale axis if load cell is mounted


C 03 L/C Charac. Value
vertical to belt.
Range: 0,01...9,9999 mV/V Default: 2,8500 mV/V

indicates the load cell characteristic value


(transmission factor). C 08 Check Weight
Range: 0,001...22000,0 kg Default: 50,000 kg

Weight of material on load cell simulated by check


C 04 L/C Rated Cap. weight

Range: 0,5000... Default: 220,000 kg


220 000.0 kg

indicates the total of load cell rated capacities.


Pivots are considered as load cells.

C 05 Eff. Platf. Length


Range: 0,1000...50,000 m Default: 1,000 m

indicates effective length of weighing platform.


0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 54 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block D : Calibrat. Results

D 01 Nominal Belt Load D 05 Tare Correction T


No input possible Default: 111,11 kg/m No input required Default: 0,00 kg/m
max. +- 1000 kg/m
computed from nominal data B 02 and B 05

used as reference value for limit values and zero Result of manual or automatic zero setting program
setting program.
After every taring operation, D 05 is set to 0.
D 02 Span Correction
Range: 0,5000...2,0000 Default: 1,0000

proportionally influences measurement of belt load q.

q(corrected) = q(measured) D 02
D 06 Belt Circuit Char
used to correct measuring system through check with
material. No input required Default: 1000000 I/U
max. 9E6
D 03 Total Tare
No input possible Default: 0,00 kg/m Result of basic calibration program Imp/Belt Circuit.
Determines cycle of setting programs.
Total tare = basic tare + tare correction
Divided by Parameter B 04 (vs Charact.Val.), belt
length in m results.
D 04 Basic Tare N
No input required Default: 0,00 kg/m
max. 10000 kg/m

Result of taring program.

Attention!
When entering Parameters D 02 ... D 05 in manual, start
with D 02.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 55
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Block E : Analog Output

E 01 Source AO 1 E 04 Source AO 2
Range: I (feed rate) Default: I Range: I (feed rate) Default: Q
Q (belt load) Q (belt load)
V (belt speed) V (belt speed)

One of these values can be output in analog fashion. One of these values can be output in analog fashion.

Filters: Parameters G 02, G 04, G 05 Filters: Parametesr G 02, G 04, G 05

E 02 Elevation AO 1 E 05 Elevation AO 2
Range: 0,00...20,00 mA Default: 4,00 mA Range: 0,00...20,00 mA Default: 4,00 mA

Output current with E 01 set to 0. Output current with E04 set to 0.


The smallest value is limited to E 02, also in stop state The smallest value is limited to E 05, also in stop state
of scale. of scale.

E 03 Limit Value AO 1 E 06 Limit Value AO 2


Range: 0,00...1000,00 mA Default: 20,00 mA Range: 0,00...1000,00 mA Default: 20,00 mA

Output current with E 01 set to 100 % (nominal value). Output current with E04 set to 100 % (nominal value).

Range of output current is limited to 0...20 mA. Current output range is limited to 0...20 mA by the
hardware.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 56 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block F : Limit Values

If measurement values exceed their MIN/MAX limits, a F 06 Event Class Q-MIN L2


corresponding event message is output (L1... L3, H1...
H3). Range: WARNING 2 Default:
WARNING 1 WARNING 2
Monitoring starts 10 s after start up. IGNORE
ALARM
F 01 Value for I-MIN
F 07 Value for Q-MAX
Range: -10...200,0 % I Default: 5,0 % I
Range: -10...200,0 % Q Default: 120,0 % Q
Reference: Nominal Feed Rate B 02.
Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01

F 02 Event Class I-MIN L1 F 08 Event Class Q-MAX H2


Range: WARNING 2 Default: Range: WARNING 2 Default:
WARNING 1 WARNING 2 WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE IGNORE
ALARM ALARM

F 03 Value for I-MAX F 09 Value for V-MIN


Range: -10...200,0 % I Default: 120,0 % I Range: -10...200,0 % V Default: 5.0 % V

Reference: Nominal Feed Rate B 02. Reference: Nominal Speed B 05

F 04 Event Class I-MAX H1


Range: WARNING 2 Default: F 10 Event Class V-MIN L3
WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE Range: WARNING 2 Default:
ALARM WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE
ALARM
F 05 Value for Q-MIN
Range: -10...200.0 % Q Default: 20,0 % Q F 11 Value for V-MAX
Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01 Range: -10...200,0 % V Default: 120,0 % V

Reference: Nominal Speed B 05

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 57
VBW INTECONT PLUS

F 12 Event Class V-MAX H3


Range: WARNING 2 Default:
WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE
ALARM

Block G : Filters

I = feed rate V = belt speed Q = belt load

G 01 I Display G 04 V Display
Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s

Feed rate display Belt speed display

G 02 I Analog output G 05 L/C Filter


Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s Range: 1.0...600.0s Default: 1.0 s

Feed rate analog output Holds for all functions and displays depending on belt
load.

G 03 Q Display G 06 Afterfl. Time


Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s Range: 0.0...2000.0 s Default: 3.0 s

Belt load display Determines the time totalization goes on after turn-off
of feeder.

All filters are of the 1st order type


(exponential), i.e. after abrupt
change of signal, approx. 2/3
of the limit value are reached
after the set time.

Longer times stabilize display


but reduce update rate. 0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 58 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block H : AUTO Zero Set

H 01 AUTO Zero Active H 04 Zero Set Limit


Range: NO Default: NO Range: 0.00...100.00 %Q Default: 5.00 %Q
YES For more information,
see Calibration item. Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01

Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01 Maximum admissible totals value of all manual and
automatic zero setting operations. Correction is not
Lets you select the automatic zero setting function acquired.
used to correct zero point on empty conveyor belt
after every belt circuit.

Prerequisites: v > vmin


No setting program
H 05 Tare Corr. > MAX C5
No parameter input Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
ALARM

H 02 Limit Value Diff. Automatic zero setting has exceeded Zero Set Limit
H04. Value is not acquired.
Range: 0.00...10.00 %Q Default: 0.50 %Q

First prerequisite for automatic zero setting.


Defines the uniformity of mean belt load between two
consecutive belt circuits. H 06 Zero Set Time
Range: 1...999 h Default: 4 h

Lets you know that no manual or automatic zero


H 03 Mean Limit Value setting nor taring has been performed during the set
time.
Range: 0.00...10.00 %Q Default: 1.00 %Q
Message C 7: Set Time To Zero
Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01

Second prerequisite for automatic zero setting.


Defines the maximum admissible belt load mean value
over 2 consecutive belt circuits.
H 07 Time Elapsed C7
Range: IGNORE Default: IGNORE
WARNING 1 Zeit : H 06
WARNING 2

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 59
VBW INTECONT PLUS

H 08 Print Result H 11 Zero Set Diff.


Range: NO Range: 0.00...100.00 %F Default: 5.0 %F
YES Default: NO
Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01
Print zero setting result after every belt circuit. Indicates the difference between two consecutive
manual or automatic zero setting operations.
Excess is reported by message C9.

Result autom. zero setting

Total Tare [kg/m] 50,23 Tare [kg/m] 1,56

(D 03) (D 05)

H 12 Tare Diff. > MAX C9


Range: WARNING 2
H 09 ZDO Active WARNING1
IGNORE
Range: NO ALARM Default: WARNING 2
YES Default: NO

Activates Zero Drop Out function (see H 10).


Manual or automatic zero setting has exceeded
difference H 11.
Correction is acquired save in case of ALARM
messages.

H 10 ZDO Limit
Range: 0.0...10.00 %Q Default: 1.00 %Q

Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01

If ZDO function is active and belt load exceeds the


defined limit, feed rate measurement and totalization
are suppressed.
No symbol appears on display.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 60 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block I : Batch Mode

The sequence of the available batch modes is I 03 Adaption Fact.


detailed in Chapter Details.
Make sure start source B 06 is not set to v. Range: 0.0...1.0 Default: 1.0

Pre-cut-off amount I 02 is adapted automatically, so


that the system better suits the situation upon next
I 01 Batch Dribble FD batch.
Value is corrected by the batch error * I 03.
Range: 0.00...220 000 kg Default: 100 000 kg
I 03 = 0: no adaption
If batch setpoint is reached Batch Setpoint I 01-I 02", I 03 = 1: full adaption
full feed output Q11 is reset; dribble feed output Q12
activated. Intermediate values cause a filtered adaption,
These signals can be used, e.g. to reduce belt speed preferred in the case of plants with non-exact
or prefeeder output. repeatability.

I 02 Batch End
Range: 0.00...220 000 kg Default: 0.000 kg
I 04 Batch Tolerance +
If batch setpoint minus pre-cut-off amount I 02 is Range: 0.0...100.0 % Default: 1.0 %
reached, batch is complete.
Drive, or prefeeder, stops. Reference: Batch Setpoint

Defines the value admissible for excess of batch


setpoint.

I 05 Batch Tolerance -
Range: 0.0...100.0 % Default: 1.0 %

Reference: Batch Setpoint

Defines the value for shortfall of batch setpoint.

I 02 makes allowance for possible afterflow. I 06 Out of Tolerance B1


Range: WARNING 1
WARNING2
ALARM
IGNORE Default: WARNING 1

Event message B1 reports excess of limit values I 04


or I 05.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 61
VBW INTECONT PLUS

I 07 Belt Empty
Range: NO Default: NO
YES

NO : Batching without belt clearance.


Stop of conveyor belt aborts batch.

YES : Batching with belt clearance.


Stop of prefeeder aborts batch.
(Prefeeder Active M 01 = YES)

I 08 Batch > Setp. B4


Range: IGNORE Default: IGNORE
WARNING1
WARNING 2
ALARM

Batch actual value exceeds setpoint by tolerance I 04.

Message B4 is output.
After acknowledgement (also ALARM messages),
monitoring of current batch cuts off.

I 09 Batch Source
Range: OP
FB Default: OP

OP : Batch setpoint, batch number and make-up


setpoint are preset from the INTECONT
keyboard.

FB : Above values are set via fieldbus interface.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 62 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block J : Printer Setting

J 01 Baud rate
Range: 2400 Default: 9600
4800
9600 30.09.97 11:45:21L2 W1 Load < MIN
19200 0.09.97 11:59:01L2 W1 Load < MIN
38400
Event report

Baud rate for transmission to printer.

J 03 Print Subtotal
Print Batch
Range: Error Default: Error
Batch number 12 YES
30.06.03 11:45:10 NO
Batch Setpoint 1000 kg
Batch Actual Val. 998 kg
Totalizer 1 1200 kg Error : Each event is printed automatically as soon
Totalizer 2 90000 kg as available.
Zero Set before 75 min
YES : See above, however, including totalizing
Events counter (FMZ) sub-totals.

NO : No printout

Printing is effected in batching and normal modes.

Save parameter J 03, all parameters are valid for batch


and counter reports.
J 02 Auto Print
Special case:
Range: NO Default: NO If a value is set to line 0 and column 0, it does not
YES appear in report.

NO : Batch report can be printed only using the


control menu.

YES : Batch report is printed automatically when


batch is complete.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 63
VBW INTECONT PLUS

J 04 Reset Print FMZ 1 J 09 Batch Act. Line


Range: NO Default: NO Range: 0...117 Default: 7
YES
YES : Reset counter 1 upon start of next batch
provided that batch report has been
printed. 1)
J 10 Batch Act. Col.
NO : Counter 1 can be reset only using the Range: 0...127 Default: 8
control function.

1) also possible without printer (J 02, J 04= YES).

J 11 FMZ 1 Line
J 05 Reset Print FMZ 2
Range: 0...117 Default: : 8
Range: NO Default: NO
YES

See J 04, however, for counter 2. J 12 FMZ 1 Column


Range: 0...127 Default: 8

J 06 Print Page Length J 13 FMZ 2 Line


Range: 9...127 lines Default: 72 lines Range: 0...117 Default: 9

The page must be minimum 4 times longer than the


number of data to be printed.
The line spacing is always 1/6 inch.
J 14 FMZ 2 Column
Change of parameter automatically initializes printer. Range: 0...127 Default: 8

J 15 Date/Time Line
J 07 Batch Setp. Line
Range: 0...117 Default: 4
Range: 0...117 Default: 6

J 16 Date/Time Col.
J 08 Batch Setp. Col.
Range: 0...127 Default: 8
Range: 0...127 Default: 8

J 17 Event Line
Range: 0...17 Default: 12
0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 64 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

J 18 Event Column J 21 Line Number Nb


Range: 0...127 Default: 8 Range: 0...117 Default: 3

J 22 Column Number Nb
J 19 Set Line to Zero ED:>0 Range: 0...127 Default: 8

Range: 0...117 Default: 10

J 20 Set Column to Zero ED:>0


Range: 0...127 Default: 8

Block K : Maintenance Int.

K 01 Maintenance Elec. K 04 Event Maint. Run. S3


Range: 0...10000 h Default: 3000 h Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
Message: S4 (K 02) WARNING 2
IGNORE
Alerts you on maintenance work to be effected after a
certain voltage ON-time.

The total of conveyor belt run times exceeds the time


defined by K 03.
When the set interval has elapsed, message S3 is
K 02 Event Maint. EL S4
output.
Range: WARNING 1 Default:
WARNING 2 WARNING 1
IGNORE
K 05 SPC Time
The total of voltage ON-times exceeds the time Range: 1...24 h Default: 8 h
defined by K 01.
When the set interval has elapsed, message S4 is Acquisition interval for service values, e.g. empty belt.
output. SPC = Statistical Process Control

K 03 Maint. STR-Meter
Range: 0...10000 h Default: 3000 h
Message: S3 (K 04)

Alerts you of maintenance work to be effected after a


certain conveyor belt run time.
0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 65
VBW INTECONT PLUS

K 06 SPC Filter
Range: 0.00...24.00 h Default: 1.00 h

Exponential first-order filter for service values, e.g.


mean value and feed rate variance.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 66 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block L : Communication Fieldbus

L 01 Protocol Type
Range: NO Default: NO
MODBUS COMP.
S5-BCC COMP.
MODBUS
PROFIBUS DP
DEVICENET
MODBUS/TCP
Every protocol requires an optional interface card to

be present.
COMP identifies the compatible protocols.

Protocol Type MODBUS/ S5-BCC Comp. MODBUS PROFIBUS DP DeviceNet MODBUS TCP ETHERNET IP
MB-COMP
.

VEG VSS VSS VSS VPB 020/8020 VCB VET 020 VET 022
020/8020

BLOCK L Default MODBUS/ PROFIBUS DEVICENET MODBUS/ ETHERNET/ S5-BCC Comp.


MB-COMP. DP TCP IP
L 01 Protocol Type NO x x x x x x
L 02 TIMEOUT Host 5s x x x x x x
L 03 Comm. Error Host IG (S 09) x x x x x x
L 04 Word sequence I:std/L:std x x x x
L 05 Byte sequence High - Low x x
L 06 Configuration FIXED x x x
L 07 Address 1 x
L 08 Resolution 4096 x
L 09 Physical attributes RS 485 x
L 10 Baud Rate 9600 x x
L 11 Data format 8-E-1 x x
L 12 Adresse 16 x
L 13 FLOAT-FORMAT IEEE x x
L 14 Address 63 x
L 15 Baud Rate 125K x
L 16 S5-Physical attributes RS422 x
L 22 Hardware VxB020 x x

Tabelle der aktiven Parameter abhngig vom Protokolltyp.

L 02 TIMEOUT Host L 03 Comm. Error Host S9


Range: 1...600s Default: 10s Range: IGNORE Default: ALARM
W1 (Warnung 1)
If timeout value exceeds zero, a message from host W2 (Warnung 2)
system is expected to arrive during set time. A (Alarm)
If no message is received during the time set by
0837
Parameter L02, event message S9 Data Link Host is
output.

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 67
VBW INTECONT PLUS

L 04 Word sequence L 09 Physical attributes


Range: I: std/L:std Default: I: std/L: std Range: RS485
I: swp/L: std RS422
I: std/L: swp RS232
I: swp/L: swp Default: RS 485
The parameter determines the word sequence within
a double word. Modbus baud rate.
I stands for IEEE-754 values (floating point values)
L stands for 4-Byte integer values
std does not reverse the word order, swp swaps
them. L 10 Baud Rate
Range: 2400 Default: 9600
4800
L 05 Byte sequence 9600
19200
Range: LOW-High Default: LOW-High 38400
High-LOW Modbus-Baudrate.
Determines the byte sequence in a data word.

L 06 Configuration
L 11 Data format
Range: FIXED Default: FIXED
NO-PARA-ID Range: 8-E-1 Default: 8-E-1
PARA-ID 8-0-1
PARA-6ID* 8-N-2
Determines the structure and the size of the process 8-N-1
image. Modbus data format (data bits-parity-stop bits).

Only with fieldbus card VxB8020.

L 07 Address L 12 Address
Range: 1...254 Default: 1 Range: 0...126 Default: 16

Slave address for Modbus protocol. Profibus DP Slaveadresse

L 08 Resolution
Range: 1...32767 Default: 4096 L 13 FLOAT-FORMAT

Resolving the data in the Modbus protocol nominal Range: SIEMENS-KG Default: IEEE
value (integer format). IEEE
Determines the display of the floating point value for
the Profibus DP protocol.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 68 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

L 14 Address
Range: 0...63 Default: 16

DeviceNet slave address.

L 15 Baud rate
Range: 125k Default: 125k
250k
500k
DeviceNet baud rates.

L 17 S5 Physical attributes
Range: RS422 Default RS 422
RS232
Setting the physical interface attributes for the S5
BCC protocol.

L 22 Hardware
Range: VxB020 Default: VxB020
VxB8020
Select fieldbus hardware for Profibus DP and
DeviceNet.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 69
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Block M : Feeder Control

M 01 Feeder Active M 04 Motor STOP aft. ST


Range: YES Range: NO
NO Default: NO YES Default: NO

YES : The START/STOP Prefeeder dialog function NO : After cut-off or batch complete command,
is active. In turned-on state, the prefeeder is belt continues running for the time specified
controlled through the scale-specific by Parameter M02.
sequence.
YES : Conveyor belt immediately stops.
NO : Dialog function is faded out.
Control output is always set to STOP Parameter is active only if Batch Mode has been
Prefeeder. preselected.
Normally, belt immediately stops.

M 02 Setting Time
M 05 Change-over FF/DF
Range: 0.0...1000.0 s Default: 0.0 s
Range: YES
Setting time of material prefeeder NO Default: YES

I 07 = YES Belt clearance.


M 05 ineffective.
M 03 Feed Distance I 07 = NO No belt clearance.
Range: 0.00...10000.00 m Default: 0.00 m Parameter M 05 lets you select Full
Feed / Dribble Feed control via
Material path from prefeeder to end of weighbridge. conveyor belt (NO), or prefeeder
Input is required only if Full Feed / Dribble Feed (YES).
control via prefeeder is desired.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 70 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block N : Scale Monitoring

N 01 CPD Active N 04 Source Sensor


Range: NO Range:
YES Default: NO DI Default: DI (DI6)

Starts speed-controlled delay element used to shift Digital input for belt sensor. Can be checked using the
belt load measurement to the point of material relevant service value.
discharge. Only DI6 can be used. If you select alternative -, BIC
and belt monitoring functions cannot be used.
Prerequisites: Speed meter must be present and
active. No belt circuit sensor is
required.
N 05 BIC Active
N 02 Platf.Dis.Length
Range: NO Default: NO
Range: 0.00...50.00 %LB Default: 0.00 %LB YES

Input required only with CPD active


Lets you start adaptive belt influence compensation
Length from mid platform to material discharge point BIC.
in % of total belt length LB.
The resolution is approx. 200. To initialize BIC:

The dynamical tare portion is cleared upon power-up


or after changes to a parameter of the following list:
N 03 Belt Sensor Active Parameter N 05 BIC Active
Parameter B 04 vs Charact. Val.
Range: NO Default: NO
YES Parameter D 06 Belt Circuit Char

Brief instructions:
Belt sensor and sensor area on conveyor belt are
designed to acquire belt slip and belt drift, and 1. N03 = YES, enter N 06... N 08.
synchronize the adaptive belt influence compensation
BIC. 2. Start setting program LB: IMP/Belt.

3. Activate BIC (N05 = YES).

4. Tare.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 71
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Action:
N 06 Sensor Length
1. Clean head and tail pulleys.
Range: 0.01....400.00 cm Default: 8.20 cm
2. Align belt.
Length of sensor area in direction of belt travel.
See also Service value Imp.S..
Monitoring system can fail, too. So watch service
values of belt circuit sensor and remove fault, if any.

N 07 Sensor Width N 11 Belt Skew


Range: 0.01...400.00 cm Default: 4.00 cm
Range: 0.01...400.00 cm Default: 12.00 cm
Limit value for admissible belt skew. If exceeded,
Width of sensor area
event message C3 Belt Skew is output and digital
output N16 DO Belt Skew is set.

N 08 Sensor Offset
Range: -400.00....400.00 cmDefault: 0.00 cm N 12 Belt Skew Event C3
Range: WARNING 1 Default: Alarm (C03)
The offset lets you correct the zero point of the belt
WARNING 2
run monitoring result.
Ignore
However, the maximum display range is limited.
Alarm
Therefore bigger corrections should be effected by
sensor shifting (see Commissioning chapter).

New display = old display - offset Conveyor belt is too far off-centre. Feeder is no longer
operable.

Action: See Belt Drift event.

N 09 Belt Drift
Range: 0.01...400.00 cm Default: 3.00 cm
N 13 Slip Limit
Limit value for admissible belt drift. If exceeded, event
message C4 Belt Drift is output and digital output Range: 0.00...10.00 %LB Default: 2.00 %LB
N15 DO Slip Event is set.
Admissible variance of belt length in % of total belt
length.
N 10 Belt Drift Event C4
Limit value exceeded, event message C8 Slip Error
Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1 is output and digital output N17 DO Slip is set.
WARNING 2 (C04)
Ignore
Alarm

Cause of event: Belt leaves specified tolerance


range.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 72 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

N 14 Slip Event C8
Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
WARNING 2 (C08)
IGNORE
ALARM

Admissible limit value (N13) is exceeded.

N 15 Do Belt Drift
Range: DO Default: __
__

Digital output used to report belt drift.

N 16 DO Belt Skew
Range: DO Default: __
__

Digital output used to indicate belt skew event.

N17 DO Slip
Range: DO Default: __
__

Digital output used to indicate belt slip event.

M 18 Freeze BIC
Range: DI Default:
__

If digital input is set, current BIC values are frozen.


This helps to protect acquired values from falsification
upon heavily varying belt loads.
0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 73
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Block O: Events

O 01 Power Failure E1 O 05 Namur Err Belt E3


Range: ALARM Default: ALARM Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
WARNING 1 ALARM
WARNING 2 IGNORE
IGNORE

Short-circuit or breakage of belt circuit sensor cable


(BIC).
O 02 Memory Error S1
Prerequisite: N 03 = YES
ALARM (S01) No changes possible.

Feeder is no longer operable.

O 06 L/C Input C1
Range: ALARM Default: ALARM
O 03 Tacho Input C2 WARNING 1
WARNING 2
Range: ALARM Default: ALARM
WARNING 1
WARNING 2
1. Load cell cable not (or improperly) connected.

Input frequency exceeds 2700 Hz. 2. Analog-to-digital converter of measuring amplifier


Monitoring starts 10 s after power-up. is in saturation (see Service Value wz_roh).

Prerequisite: B 03 = YES 3. Supply voltage has fallen below 19V.

Fault must be available for min. 3 s.

O 04 Namur Err. Tacho E2


Range: ALARM Default: ALARM O 07 No Release S2
WARNING 1
WARNING 2 Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
IGNORE WARNING 2
IGNORE

RELEASE input signal pending.


Cable breakage or short-circuit.
Special case:
Prerequisite: B 03 = YES IGNORE always releases feeder.

Namur errors reset internal speed value to 0.


Frequency display (service value) is still active.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 74 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

O 08 L/C Input > MAX H4


Range: ALARM Default: ALARM
WARNING 1
WARNING 2

Load on load cell exceeds 110 % of the total of load


cell rated capacities (C 04).

Full scale: approx. 115 % with CSD load cells.

O 09 L/C Input < MIN L4


Range: ALARM Default: ALARM
WARNING 1
WARNING 2

Load on load cells is smaller than 3 % of the total of


load cell rated capacities.

O 10 Simulation Active S7
Range: WARNING 1 Default:
WARNING 2 WARNING 2
ALARM
IGNORE

Simulation mode started

O 11 Error Ext. Event E6


Range: ALARM Default: ALARM
WARNING 1
WARNING 2
IGNORE
The event E6 is set when the external digital input
(parameter P06) is set.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 75
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Block P: Digital Inputs

P 01 Release P 05 DI Setting to zero


Range: DI Default: DI (DI1) Range: DI Default:
__

Determine digital input for feeder release. The function setting to zero can also be started via the
digital input. The program is started by a positive flank
Setting - means that no release is required. of the contact. The result is automatically accepted if it
is within the admissible zero setting limit (5% of the
Default is DI1, however, any other free digital input nominal belt load). An ackowledgement of the result is
can be used as well. not necessary. The calibration program can only be
aborted in its active phase.

P 02 DI Stop Batch
Range: DI Default: DI (DI3) P06 DI Ext. Event

Range: Default:
DI
Digital input signal used to abort a running batch.
Digital input for external fault signals

P 03 Ackn. Events
Range: DI Default: DI (DI1)

Digital input used to acknowledge event messages.


Level acts statically and should not be permanently
available (permanent acknowledgement).

P 04 DI Start
Range: DI Default:
__

If OP has been selected for start source, digital input


DI Start can be configured and used to start feeder
using a start pulse (key). Feeder is stopped by a pulse
output across digital input Release.
This configuration is possible parallel to the 0837
START/STOP keys on INTECONT keyboard.

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 76 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block Q: Digital Outputs

Q 01 DO Alarm Q 05 DO I-MAX
Range: DO Default: DO I+DO3 LO Range: DO Default: DO (DO2)

Digital output used to report general alarm. Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum
feed rate (F03) is exceeded up.
Contact output is independent of event class (F04).

Q 02 DO Prefeeder ON
Range: DO Default: DO (DO4) Q 06 DO Q-MIN

Range: DO Default:
Digital output used to START/STOP prefeeder.

Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum


belt load (F05) is exceeded down.
Q 03 DO Feeder ON Contact output is independent of event class (F06).
Range: DO Default: DO (DO5)

Q 07 DO Q-MAX
Digital output signal used to indicate START/STOP
state of scale. Range: DO Default:

This very output can also be used to START/STOP
drive.
Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum
belt load (F07) is exceeded up.
Contact output is independent of event class (F08).
Q 04 DO I-MIN
Q 08 DO v-MIN
Range: DO Default: Do (DO1)
Range: DO Default:

Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum


feed rate (F01) is exceeded down. Contact output is Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum
independent of event class (F02). belt speed (F09) is exceeded down.
Contact output is independent of set event class
(F10).

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 77
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Q 09 DO v-MAX Q13 DO Keyboard Mode


Range: DO Default: Bereich: Ur-Wert:
DO
Digital output signal to report activated keyboard
mode.
Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum
belt speed (F11) is exceeded up.
Contact output is independent of set event class
(F12).

Q 10 DO Batch Active
Range: DO Default:

Digital output signal reporting that a batch is active.


Signal becomes active upon start of batch and is
deactivated when batch is complete. Signal remains
available after abort of batch.

Q 11 DO Full Feed
Range: DO Default: DO (DO6)

Full feed signal is available from start of batch until


batch amount Value for I-MIN (F01)- Batch Dribble
FD (I02) is reached. Batching continues in dribble
feed.

Q 12 DO Dribble Feed
Range: DO Default: DO (DO7)

Dribble feed signal is output after the full feed phase


(see Q11).

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 78 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block R: Comm. EasyServe

R 01 Station Address R 04 Format Data


Range: 1...254 Default: 1 Range: 8-0-1 Default: 8-0-1
8-E-1
Station address and baud rate of feeder and 8-N-1
EasyServe must be identical.
The relevant setting (including communication
interface) can be searched using EasyServe (menu: EasyServe always uses an 11-bit character frame.
Tools/Options/Communication).
The station address is specially designed for plants For example:
using a service bus. If the latter is not available,
select 1. 8-0-1 means:

Connection to PC can also be made using a 9-pole 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
SUB-D connector on X4 (RS 232 only) or a Phoenix (N = No parity, E = Even Parity)
connector on X5 (RS232, RS422 or RS485).
See also Wiring Diagram in chapter DETAILS.

R 05 Connection
R 02 Physics Range: Serial Default: Serial
SERIAL+TCP
Range: RS 232 Default: RS 232
RS 422
RS 485 If MODBUS/TCP (Ethernet) has been selected for
fieldbus, communication between feeder and
EasyServe can also take place via Ethernet.
Determines the physics of the data transmission To do so, set Connection parameter to SERIAL-TCP.
protocol.

R 06 MODBUS Idle Time


R 03 EasyServe Baudr.
Range: 2...20ms Default: 4 ms
Range: 9600 Default: 19200
19200 For Modbus driver, single character timeout (idle time)
38400 for end recognition can be adjusted using this
parameter (see BVH2220).

Baud rate

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 79
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Block S: Secondary display DLZ

S01 DLZ active Note: the BVH2015 Manual on Secondary/Large-Scale


Displays
Range: YES Default: NO
NO
A large-scale display such as DLZ055 or DLZ110 can
be connected at the serial interface on the VEA600V
option card (plug X10). Procedure DDP8861 is used. S02 Baud rate
Range: 1200 Default: 9600
Selecting DLZ active suppresses all printing outputs
2400
and the secondary display is triggered instead. The
4800
value shown on the lowest line of INTECONT Plus is
9600
always outputted.
19200
38400
Display on Character on
the secondary meaning
INTECONT Plus display
I I feed rate [kg/h] or [ t\h]

Ir i
relative feed rate [%] rated feed S03 Data format
rate
Q Q belt load [kg\m] Range: 7 Bit, Even Parity Default: 8Bit NO
relative belt load [%] rated belt
Qr q
load
8 Bit, No Parity
v v belt speed [m/s]
Z1 1 counter 1 [kg] or [t]
Z2 2 counter 2 [kg] or [t]
Z3 3 counter 3 [kg] or [t] S04 Physics
ZB B batching setpoint [kg] or [t]
Zd R batching residual value [kg] or [t] Range: RS232 Default:: RS232
Nb N consecutive batching number RS485
ZI F actual batching value [kg] or [t] RS422
Zbn b reloading setpoint [kg] or [t]
residual batching value of the
Zdn r
quantity reloaded [kg] or [t]

The DLZ055/110 secondary display can only show the


dimensions kg and t.

If the letter field of the secondary display is illuminated


as a full-surface block, this indicates that the value
shown is invalid. Either it is not possible to show the
desired format or INTECONT is in service operation.

The VLZ20100/VLZ20045 secondary displays can also


be connected, although they do not have any display for
identification and the validity of the outputted
measurement.

The usage of other secondary displays that understand


the DDP8861 protocol has to be examined in specific
cases.
0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 80 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Block U: Ethernet

U 01 IP Address1 U 07 Net mask 3


Range: 0-255 Default: 192 Range: 0-255 Default: 255

Manual IP address assignment Delegating the subnetwork masks

U 02 IP Address 2 U 08 Net mask 4


Range: 0-255 Default: 168 Range: 0-255 Default: 0

Manual IP address assignment Delegating the subnetwork masks

U 03 IP Address 3 U 09 Gatway 1
Range: 0-255 Default: 240 Range: 0-255 Default: 192

Manual IP address assignment Festlegung der Standard-Gateway-Adresse.

U 04 IP Address 4 U 10 Gatway 2
Range: 0-255 Default: 1 Range: 0-255 Default: 168

Manual IP address assignment Delegating the standard gateway address

U 05 Net mask1 U 11 Gatway 3


Range: 0-255 Default: 255 Range: 0-255 Default: 240

Delegating the subnetwork masks Delegating the standard gateway address

U 06 Net mask2 U 12 Gatway 4


Range: 0-255 Default: 255 Range: 0-255 Default: 0

Delegating the subnetwork masks Delegating the standard gateway address

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 81
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Block V: Fixmode Parameters

As of version VBW20600-08, the options FIXED-1 and V 07 ID preset value 7


FIXED-2 in parameter L06, Configuration, are no
longer available and have been replaced by Range: 0...4086 Default: 0
FIXED.The values carried over with the setting FIXED
are determined by the following parameters. The
settings of the original values correspond to the
previous FIXED mode 1.A list of all available
V 08 ID preset value 8
identifiers and FIXED mode examples can be found in
the manual BV-H2220. Range: 0...4086 Default: 0

V 01 ID preset value 1
Range: Fest eingestellt Default: 320
V 09 ID read value 1
Command 4+5 Range: 0...4086 Default: 752

V 02 ID preset value 2 Status 2+3

Range: 0...4086 Default: 352


V 10 ID read value 2
Command 6+7 Range: 0...4086 Default: 784

V 03 ID preset value 3 Status 4+5

Range: 0...4086 Default: 384


V 11 ID read value 3
Command 8+9 Range: 0...4086 Default: 1552

V 04 ID preset value 4 Highest priority event

Range: 0...4086 Default: 596


V 12 ID read value 4
Rreload setpoint [kg] Range: 0...4086 Default: 1872

V 05 ID preset value 5 Actual flow rate [kg/hr]

Range: 0...4086 Default: 594

Batch setpoint [kg] V 13 ID read value 5


Range: 0...4086 Default: 1874

V 06 ID preset value 6 Totalizing counter 1 [kg]

Range: 0...4086 Default: 598


0837
Batch number

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 82 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

V 14 ID read value 6
Range: 0...4086 Default: 1880

Belt load

V 15 ID read value 7
Range: 0...4086 Default: 1884

Belt speed

V 16 ID read value 8
Range: 0...4086 Default: 1876

Totalizing counter 2 [kg]

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 83
VBW INTECONT PLUS

This page left intentionally blank.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 84 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

10 Event Messages

System Messages S S9 : Data Link Host


Serial communication interrupted for longer
S1 : Memory Error than timeout.
Action : Check cable connections.
Parameter : L 03
Program and parameter memories are
checked in cycles. If an error is found, cal is
inoperable in most cases.
Action : Contact the SCHENCK
Service.
Parameter: O02 Electrics E
S2 : No Release E1 : Power Failure

External RELEASE signal pending. Power failed or cut off.


Scale cannot start. Feed rate possibly not recorded during this
Parameter : O 07 time.
Action : Acknowledge message.
Parameter : O 01
S3 : Maint. STR Meter

Total ON-time of conveyor belt and E2 : Namur Err Tacho


measurement is exceeded.
Perform requisite service work, if necessary. Short circuit or breakage in speed transducer
Acknowledgement of message does not cable. Scale no longer operable.
influence time intervals. Action : Check speed transducer cable.
Parameters : K 03, K 04 Deselect speed measurement
for a short time using
Parameter B 03 .
S4 : Maintenance Int. Elec Parameter : O 04

The INTECONT power supply has been


switched on for a preset period of time. E3 : Namur Err Belt
Perform requisite service work, if necessary.
Acknowledgement of message does not Short circuit or breakage in belt circuit sensor
influence time intervals. cable.
Parameters : K 01, K 02 Action : Check sensor cable.
Parameter : O 05

S7 : Simulation Active

Operating in Simulation mode, scale is not E6 : Error Ext. Event


prepared for normal operation.
The Simulation mode lets you test all scale There is an external fault signal.
functions without material at the time of Actions: Rectify fault.
commissioning. Parameter: P06 nd O11
Action : Deselect Simulation function.
Parameter : N1

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Event Messages
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 85
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Calibration C C7 : Set Time To Zero

C1 : L/C Input During preset time, no taring nor manual or


automatic zero setting has taken place.
Load cell cable broken, not or improperly Action : Tare or set to zero,
connected. Supply voltage too low. acknowledge message.
Action : Check cabling. Parameters : H 06, H 07
If OK, check load cell amplifier.
Parameter : O 06

C8 : Slip Error
C2 : Tacho Input
Conveyor belt length inadmissibly changed.
Speed transducer output frequency exceeds Error is acquired only using additional belt
3000 Hz, most probably due to subsequent circuit sensor.
change of belt speed (e.g. gearbox). Action : Check belt tension; if
Action : Check speed transducer for necessary, correct.
proper dimensioning. Check sensor for proper
If necessary, measure pulse measuring distance.
frequency using oscillograph. Parameters : N13, N14
Parameter : O 03

C9 : Tare Diff > MAX


C3 : Belt Skew
Automatic or manual zero setting has detected
Conveyor belt runs too far off centre. Scale is excessive zero point deviation.
no longer operable. Correction takes place only if no Alarm is
Action: See C4 available.
Parameters: N11, N12 Action : Acknowledge message, clean
scale; if need be, retare.
Parameters : H 01, H 11, H 12
C4 : Belt Drift

Belt has left defined tolerance zone.


Action: 1) Clean head and tail pulleys.
2) Align belt.
Parameters: N09, N10

C5 : Tare Corr. > MAX

Automatic zero setting has exceeded specified


limit. No correction takes place.
Action : Clean scale; if need be, retare.
Parameter : H 01, H 04, H 05

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Event Messages Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 86 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Maximum H Minimum L
H1 : I > MAX L1 : I < MIN

Current feed rate exceeds set limit value. Current feed rate has fallen below set limit
Action : Normally none, unless value. Error in measurement possibly out of
message H4 is available or tolerance.
system-specific limits have to Action : System specific unless L4 is
be observed. additionally available
Parameters : F 03, F 04 Parameters : F 01, F 02

H2 : Load > MAX L2 : Load < MIN

Current belt load exceeds set limit value. Current belt load has fallen below set limit
Action : Normally none, unless value.
message H4 is available or Action : See L1
system-specific limits have to Parameters : F 05, F 06
be observed.
Parameters : F 07, F 08

L3 : V < MIN

H3 : v > MAX Current belt speed has fallen below set limit
value.
Current belt load exceeds set limit value. Action : Check to see if belt is running.
Action : System specific unless C2 is Parameters : F 09, F 10
additionally available.
Parameters : F 11, F 12

L4 : L/C Input < MIN

H4 : L/C Input > MAX Weighing system underloaded. Errors in


measurement possible.
Weighing system overloaded. Errors in Action : Check mechanical weighing
measurement possible. system, weighed idler
Action : Check material infeed; belt alignment and load cell cable.
load is too big. Parameter : O 09
Parameter : O 08

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Event Messages
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 87
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Batching Signal Lamps


B1 : Out of Tolerance
a (green) POWER OK
Batch not completed with specified accuracy. LED not lit:
Tolerance : Parameters I 04, 05 1. No power supply
Event : Parameter I 06 2. Device defective
Cause : Automatic adaption started 3. All other functions OK, LED
(Parameter I 03) ? probably defective. Call display
Material infeed or belt drive test.
faulty ?
b (green) CPU OK
Display pending or flashing,
processor system is faulty. Scale is
inoperable.
X (red) ALARM
B4: MAX Batch Act. Value flashes if an Alarm message is
available.
Current batch actual value exceeds preset Display additionally shows event
tolerance. code.
Limit value : Parameters I 04, I 08
Action : See relevant event
code.

MIN (red) MIN LIMIT VALUE


lit if feed rate limit value is exceeded
down.

Action : See L1: I<MIN

MAX (red) MAX LIMIT VALUE


lit if feed rate limit value is exceeded
up.

Action : See H1: I>MAX.

No power supply:

Upon short circuit on the secondary side of the power


supply, internal overload protection responds.
Disconnect power supply for approx. 1 minute, and its
is ready to operate again.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Event Messages Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 88 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

11 Commissioning

How To Operate Your INTECONT

1. Event E2 = O04
There is no way out. Namur Err. Tacho

Who wants to put the INTECONT into service has to


work himself through the Operation and Service
Manuals.
To make learning easier, the INTECONT can be Operate cursors to view available
operated without mechanical equipment, load cells events.
and speed transducer.
Although no feed rate is displayed, all operating T 1. Namur Err. Tacho E2
functions can be performed. Speed transducer not connected, or

1. Connect power supply and turn on (Chapter


U cabling faulty.

DETAILS). 2. L/C Input C1


Load cell not connected, or
2. The upper two green LEDs report Ready to cabling error.
Operate, the red LED in the middle flashes and
reports Alarm E1. 3. L/C Input >MIN L4

4. No release S2
No external RELEASE signal.
Z= 0t
E1 I= 0 kg/h
4. If you wish to turn off the flashing signal lamp or
try the setting programs, change some
parameters as shown in Parameterization
chapter.
Upper display : Totalizing Counter Z1 (a) Parameter O04 to WARNING 1 E2
Lower Display : Event Message E1 (b) Parameter O06 to WARNING 1 C1
Power Failure Feed Rate I (c) Parameter O09 to WARNING1 L4
(d) Parameter O07 to IGNORE S2
O Acknowledge Message E1 with key (e) Parameter B 03 to --
ACK.
Display shows Event Message E2 Deselect belt speed measurement with Parameter B
which reports that no speed transducer 03. Weigher can then operate without tacho generator.
is connected.
Use residual parameters to change the event class of
the 4 message types.
3. Except Scale ON and Set to Zero, all
functions described in the Operating Manual can 5. Set Release contact (Parameter P01).
be performed, e.g. display of event messages.
G Call function distributor. 6. Start INTECONT, all setting programs are
available.
f Start function Display Events. First call LB program as described in Chapter 6

and acquire result using the f key.


7. To simulate belt load, see Test Plug item.
0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Commissioning
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 85
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Out-of-round
Mechanical Prerequisites The out-of-round error of idlers in the weigher
influential zone must not exceed 0.2 mm.
Mount mechanical equipment in accordance with the
instructions given in separate manual. Check weighed
and carrying idlers in the weigher influential zone for Securement
correct alignment and out-of-round.
After alignment, secure idler sets against
displacement.
Mark idlers and sets to avoid mistakes during
maintenance.

Influences

Incorrect alignment entails a zero point error which is


normally compensated during calibration.
Influential zone However, changes in belt tension increase the error
size.
All weighed idlers and three carrying idlers upstream For this reason, ensure correct alignment and
and downstream of weighing station. constant belt tension for accurate weighing.

Alignment Maintenance

Raise idlers in the influential zone to approx. 3...5 mm If idlers are dismounted for maintenance work to be
above remaining idlers. Align then against one effected, make sure that they are remounted in their
another to a height difference below 0.2 mm. former locations.

Electrical Prerequisites

Run and connect cables as described in Chapter


DETAILS.

Depending on idler set equipment, idlers have to be


aligned in various points.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Commissioning Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 86 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Enter Parameters

All important rated and calibration data are shown in


the supplied Spec Sheet.
In addition, see hints given below. We recommend to
read through all parameters and to select the best
possible setting.

Parameter Block A

Dialog language and display unit.


Parameter values are automatically converted if the
unit is changed.

Parameter Block B
Determine belt inclination by using spirit level and
measuring element. Repeat measurement with spirit
Characteristic value vs B 04 is important for
level turned and calculate mean value of height h.
calibration. Adjust units to nominal feed rate. To
ensure stable display, resolution of feed rate display
(B 01) should not exceed 4...5 decimals.
Display format of totalizing counters should not
exceed 6...7 digits. The decimal point is one digit.

Example: Angle C 07: a = tan (h/l)

Nominal feed rate 10 t/h Angles < 20 degr.: a = 55 h/l


Unit B 07 -.- t
Max. Wert 999.999 t Parameter Block D

Calibration results need not be entered.


During initial calibration, range correction D 02 should
be set to 1.
Max. counter run time = Check to see if, with rated data entered, load cell
rated capacity is not exceeded.

Then counter is reset. F = q * L * H * cos(a)

If an external totalizing counter is connected, output q = nominal belt load D 01 in kg/m


frequency must not exceed 10 Hz (see Parameters B L = eff. platform length C 05 in m
07, 08 and Service Displays Z0 and ZE).
H = lever ration C 06
Parameter Block C a = angle C 07 in degr.
F = force on load cell in kg
Ensure correct input of calibration and evaluation data
as shown in relevant Spec Sheet. Measure effective F should be the total of load cell rated capacities C
belt length and inclination at site. 04. If not, load cells are too small for the requested
For definition of belt length, see Chapter DETAILS. nominal feed rate.

Enter belt inclination only if load cells are arranged


right-angled to belt. If load cells are mounted
vertically, the effective angle is 0. For definition of
check weight, see Data Flow Diagrams in Chapter
0837 DETAILS.

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Commissioning
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 87
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Parameter Block F
Functional Check
Select limit values and their event classes in
accordance with application requirements. 1. Start weigher and conveyor belt.
Parameter Block G Starting depends on selected start source B 06 .
Acknowledge Message E1.
Adjust display filters, if required. Normally, the default
values can be used. 2. As running display, a rotating point appears in
top left display field.
If not, Parameter Vmin (F 09) is set too high or
START key has not been operated.
Parameter Block H
3. Interpret event messages, if any, as shown in
See Automatic Zero Setting. Maintain default values Chapter 10 and remedy fault.
for the time being. Do not start automatic zero setting
before calibration is effected.

Parameter Block K 4. Call Service messages.

For calibration, the maintenance parameters are (a) Tachometer


irrelevant. The default values are useful suggestions. If measurement is ON (B 03 = DI7), speed
transducer output frequency must be below
3000 Hz. Compare value with Spec Sheet. If
Parameter Block N frequency heavily varies at constant belt
speed, there is too much space between
Measuring at discharge point (CPD) should normally be speed transducer NAMUR sensor and
activated (N 01, N 02). For automatic belt influence gearing. See also Check of Belt Speed.
compensation (BIC) and belt drift display, a special belt
circuit sensor and a metal sensor area on belt are
required. If these are not available, set Parameter N 03 (b) wz
to NO. Disconnect BIC during initial commissioning. The unnormalized output value of load cell
amplifier must not exceed 2.85mV/V, not even
Parameter Block O
with nominal platform load. Value changes
with varying load on platform (e.g. check
The event classes are selected for a standard scale. If
weight).
messages O 04, O 06 and O 07 have been modified
for training, reset to default.
Value excessive:

Load cell overloaded


Tare balance weight, if any, improperly set

Value negative:

Load cell improperly connected


Tare balance weight, if any, improperly set

(c) aw
Load on load cell in percent related to the total
of load cell rated capacities.
Interpret as under Item b). At nominal belt
load, aw should not exceed 100%.

5. If all else fails, see Test Plug item.


0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Commissioning Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 88 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Calibration Check Using Check Weight

Calibration as such is not required. After input of rated Check with check weight is useful because
and calibration data, scale is calibrated.
1. Mechanical or electrical faults may be given
Simply call:
2. Calibration data may be uncertain, e.g. lever
1. Setting program Belt Circuit LB determining the ratio not exactly known, inclination hard to
basis of one belt circuit for zeroing and taring measure
programs
3. Incorrect data may have been entered.

2. Taring program TW The check weight should range between 30 %...100


% of nominal platform load and be exactly known.

3. Zero setting program for training. Zero point error 1. Enter effective check weight as Parameter C 08.
should be small after taring. If weighing modules with leaf spring parallel
guidance are used, the check weight corresponds
Always observe the above order of sequence. to the actual value. In other cases, see Spec Sheet
or calculate check weight in accordance with
For first program, measure exact time of one belt Chapter DETAILS / Data Flow Diagrams. For
circuit and enter value into Parameter C 02. For effective check weight, belt inclination is irrelevant.
operation and message interpretation, see Chapter 3.

Two further checks should be effected:

1. Check using check weight 2. Call program Weight Check CW,


as shown in Chapter Setting Programs.
2. Check of belt speed
For evaluation of results, see operating sequence des-
cription.

Possible causes of faults:

Distorsion of platform, insufficient alignment,


interferences on load cell cable.

In case of suspicion, repeat check with another


weight.

If something goes wrong: Unlinearity is mostly due to above faults; linear errors,
our service department is always prepared to help. to incorrect data.
Maybe only some small error or maloperation is the
cause of trouble. Check individual operations one
by one. Normally, the issue can be eliminated.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Commissioning
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 89
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Check Belt Speed Check Using Material

The speed transducer frequency generator can be Checks or calibrations with check weights cannot
driven by reproduce the actual circumstances to perfection.
1. Friction wheel in the lower belt run Highly accurate weighing results can be achieved only
2. Drive motor shaft. by various measurements with material and
subsequent correction.
In the first case, the entered characteristic value vs
(Parameter B 04) depends on the exact friction wheel For correction, use Parameter D 02.
diameter; in the second, on the belt wrap factor.
Hence, check speed measurement for accuracy. Observe the following items:
1. Acquire belt speed with stop watch and tape 1. Make sure the route from platform to material
measure. collecting point is clean.
To be on the safe side, conduct various
measurements and calculate mean value. 2. Ensure that material diverters, if any, do not
divert any material.

2. Read INTECONT speed display over the same 3. If feed screws or air slides are used between
period of time. platform and collecting point, feeding starts
approx. 30 min. before check measurement so
3. Compare both values with one another and, if that normal build-ups are given.
necessary, correct characteristic value vs B 04.
4. Set dedustings to a minimum.

5. Ensure that hoppers or vehicles used for


transport of material to a legal-for-trade weigher
are cleaned and weighed before every filling
operation (tare).
old = old parameter value
Example:
new = new parameter value
Vg = measured speed
Old value of Parameter D 02 = 1
Va = read off speed
Within 15 min. a material amount of MW = 4.9 t is fed.
Difference in counter reading MA read on INTECONT
This method is also applicable with unknown
is 5.0 t.
characteristic values.

If characteristic value vs is known and deviations are


excessive, the space between sensor (Namur
transducer) and gearing is too big. Check by switching
ammeter into sensor circuit. = 1 x 4.9 = 0.98

5.0
Tooth over sensor: i= 0.1...1.65 mA Enter computed value into Parameter D 02 .
else: i = 1.65...8 mA

Neither level should exceed limit value 1.65 mA.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Commissioning Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 90 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Automatic Zero Setting Belt Run Monitoring

Activate the automatic zero setting function only in INTECONT comes with belt a belt run monitoring
clearly defined cases, e.g. if some belt circuits are run function designed to detect belt drift and belt slip.
with no load. Activate monitoring using Parameter N03 Belt Sensor
Active.
Parameter H 01 = JA Automatic active
= NO Automatic not active The belt run monitoring functions can be used only if a
belt circuit sensor (Namur transducer) and
Automatic system is active both in turned-on and a triangle metal sensor area on belt area
turned-off state of scale, if belt speed exceeds Vmin. available (see Fig. Below). If not,
Parameters N03 Belt Sensor Active and
N05 BIC Active must be set to NO.

Z1 = 2500 kg
I = 0 kg/h

Measuring result of one belt circuit is continuously


compared to previous result.
If Belt Empty is identified, zero point is automatically
corrected.
Set continuous plausibility check with Parameters H
Fig.: Belt Run Monitoring
02 and H 03. For normal conveyor belts, default
values can be used, however, a check is
recommended. To activate belt run monitoring:
1. Set Parameter N03 Belt Sensor Active to
1. Deactivate automatic H 01 = NO. YES.
2. Call zero setting program via function distributor 2. Enter sensor length L into Parameter N06
various times and acquire result. Sensor Length (s. Belt Run Monitoring figure).
3. Note final results Dev. (upper display) as of 3. Enter sensor width B into Parameter N07
second run. Sensor Width (s. Belt Run Monitoring figure).
4. The
. highest value of Item 3 is the smallest value 4. Set Parameter N08 Sensor Offset to 0.
for Parameter H 02. 5. Call calibrating function LB: IMP/Belt.
Enter double to triple value, but min. 0.1 %. 6. Acquire result after min. 2 belt circuits.
5. Parameter H04 monitors the total of all zeroing 7. Adjust sensor.
operations. Enter value, e.g. 2...4 times higher Note: Service value Imp.S indicates the
than H 02. number of pulses measured for the covered
6. Activate Automatic using Parameter H 01. sensor. If the belt sensor is located exactly in mid
sensor area, the following value results:

Imp.S. = 0.5 * L (N06) * 0.01 * vs_Charact. Val.


(B04)

Example: N06 = 8.40 cm and


B04 = 1000 I/m result in Imp.S. = 42

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Commissioning
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 91
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Note: Monitor service value Belt Drift Tr indicating


the deviation of mid sensor and thus of belt from Control for Point of Discharge CPD
sensor position in cm.
Upon measurement at the point of discharge, the
Example: Belt drift = 0.20 cm: Parameter N08 measuring point of the weighing platform is shifted to
Sensor Offset = - 0.20 cm indicates belt slip 0.00 cm. the point of material discharge using a delay element.
The amount discharged is measured direct.
8. If necessary, determine event classes of belt slip
and drift messages (Parameters N09...N17). Note: If CPD is active, Automatic Belt Influence
Compensation BIC should be started as well.
Note: Normally, the default values can be used
in actual practice. Prerequisites:
Length ratio from mid platform to material discharge
point and total conveyor belt length is known.
9. Check messages.
Length ratio in percent is entered into Parameter
Note: To check, adapt Parameter N08 N02 Platf.Dis.Length.
SensorOffset accordingly and remember to
reset value to default. To start CPD, set Parameter N01 CPD Active to
YES .

Belt Influence Compensation BIC

The automatic Belt Influence Compensation BIC is


designed to monitor and correct the belt influence. As
is with belt run monitoring, a sensor and a sensor area
are required. To commission BIC, first start belt run
monitoring.

Note: Perform initial commissioning without active


BIC.

Features

After start of the belt influence compensation, the


influence of the conveyor belt on measurement will be
compensated after approx. 10 belt circuits.

Prerequisites:
Belt run monitoring commissioned
Belt run monitoring started.

To start BIC, set Parameter N05 BIC Active to YES


.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Commissioning Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 92 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

reached.
Cosine Pendulum If items 4 and 5 cannot be performed, use
pendulum position and Rv in turn.
Belt weighers with variable belt inclination are equipped
with a so-called cosine pendulum which compensates 7. Tare scale, best in horizontal position.
the impact of inclination on measuring result.
8. Calibrate range using check weight and
The pendulum is switched into the load cell (L/C) Parameter D 02. Use setting program CW.
supply voltage.

L/C RD Rp Rw Angle C 06
Test Plug
1 x CSD 4000 3000 727 0.73
2 x CSD 2000 1500 363 +/- 30 0.73
1 x HBM 350 300 123 0.64

Almost any possible error in operation is reported by


event message. For interpretation, see Chapter 10.
RD = load cell input resistance in ohms
Check INTECONT for proper operation by using a
Rp = pendulum potentiometer resistance in ohms simple test plug. This helps to see whether the fault is
Rw = calibrated resistance of Rv in ohms with load cel, or cabling and electrical equipment.

1. Position pendulum near weighbridge and align 1. Switch plug as shown in drawing.
using spirit level.
2. Withdraw load cell connector X7 and replace by
2. Param.: Angle a (C 07) = 0 test plug.
Lever (C 06) = table value
Basic Tare N (D 04) = 0 At the indicated resistance values, the following
Tare Correction T (D 05) = 0 service values result:
Do not tare scale.
1. wz apr.1.1mV/V
3. Use Rv to preset RW with highest possible
accuracy. 2. Load cell apr. 55 % (C 03 =2mV/V)
utilization aw apr. 39% (C03 =2.85mV/V)
4. Bring weigher into two opposite positions,
e.g. degr. Apply check weight, if necessary. If wz is in specified range, measuring amplifier
properly operates.
5. Set belt load displays to same value by correcting
the pendulum case zero point position. Note:
The test plug ordering number is V037426.B01.
6. Use potentiometer rv to vary range until until
0837
minimum dependence of belt inclination is

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Commissioning
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 93
VBW INTECONT PLUS

This page left intentionally blank.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Commissioning Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 94 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

12 Details

Start / Stop

Start / stop states exclusively refer to belt drive, 3. START/STOP with belt speed higher, or smaller,
prefeeder and feed rate measurement. than set limit value Vmin (v).
Belt load and belt speed are acquired in either case. System prompts for input of unmeaned value
Display with START Rotating point in upper display : measured for speed V.
field.
Rotation speed is approximately
proportional to feed rate, but
never zero.

Display with STOP Point stands still after completion


:
of measurement.
After effective stop command, totalization is cut off as
soon as set afterflow time Tnach has elapsed.
STOP commands have highest priority.

Four different control modes can be configured (see


also Parameter B06).

1. START/STOP using digital input.

The default value is DI2. However, you can use any 4. START/STOP via fieldbus interface (FB).
other free digital input as well.
Serial START/STOP commands acts in the same
The digital input operates edge-controlled, i.e. If ways as the corresponding keys.
scale cuts off after Alarm, START signal must be
The Select Keyboard Mode function lets you shift the
removed and applied again.
Start/Stop commands onto keyboard.
Return to Deselect Keyboard Mode function using
Parameter B06.

2. START/STOP using keyboard (OP)

Start : START key if no Alarm is


available and release signal
has been output.

0837 Stop: Stop key, Alarm, or No


Release.

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Details
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 93
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Note
1) Selection v does not allow for batching.

2) Digital input Release P01 can be cut off (setting


- -), and scale is released always.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Details Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 94 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Batching Without Clearance

If batch is complete, belt drive is cut-off. Feeding by


full feed/dribble feed can be controlled via belt speed
or prefeeder (dashed line).
It is recommended to activate delay for material
discharge (O 01 = YES).
Select keyboard as START source
(B 06 = DE + T).
For details, see OPERATION chapter.

Parameter Schedule:
B 06 START source OP
G 06 Belt tracking time Tn apr. 3 s

Feed rate determination tracking time after


belt cut-off.
Enables afterflowing material to be acquired.
N 01 CPD Active YES

Delay for point of discharge


I 01 Batch Dribble Feed kg

Change-over point from full feed to dribble


feed, e.g. by belt speed reduction. Enter
deviation from cut-off point I 02 (see Figure). I 03 = 0 : No adaptation
I 02 Batch Cut-Off Point kg I 03 = 1 : Full adaption
Intermediate values lead to filtered
Belt drive cut-off point. To be set to slightly adaptation.
below setpoint to enable afterflowing material
to be acquired.
Suggestion: I 03 = 0.6
Suggestion:
Mean dribble feed feed rate in kg/h divided by I 04... For monitoring, see Parameter List.
3600.
I 03 Correction Factor 0.6 I 07 Empty Belt NO
Dribble feed changeover and cut-off points Prerequisite for batching mode.
are automatically adapted upon completion of
batch for system to be better matched to M 01 Feeder Active
actual conditions until the time of next
batching operation. NO : Feeder control output is always
LOW. Full feed/dribble feed
changeover must be controlled via
belt drive. Function Next W/Belt
Empty is not possible.
YES : Prerequisite for feeder control via
batch mode and for function
0837 START/STOP Feeder.

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Details
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 95
VBW INTECONT PLUS

M 05 = NO
M 02 Setting Time sec
No entry required.
From 0 to nominal feed rate (see Sequence M 04 Motor STOP Aft. ST YES/NO
and Parameter M 04).
Use M 04 to determine whether belt tracking
M 03 Feed Distance m
is desired after completion of batch or after
cut-off.
Material path from feeder to end of weighing
With slow feeders, tracking helps to avoid
platform.
excess feed.
If CPD is active (N 01 = YES) the length from Prerequisite: M 01 = YES
platform center to point of discharge (N 02)
has to be added. 0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Details Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 96 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

M 05 Change-over FF/DF Adaption:


NO Change-over via belt drive After every completed batch, system uses the missing
YES : Change-over via feeder amount to compute a correction value for cut-off point
(signals dashed in diagram) A (I 02). Dribble feed changeover point is
automatically corrected.
Sequence:
0 Start batch through START command. Error = SETPOINT - amount fed
Belt drive, prefeeder, totalization (counters)
start operating. The new cut-off point for the next batch is computed
from the error and an evaluation factor.
1 Abort batch through STOP command.
To avoid excess feed, belt drive continues
running for time TZ after feeder cut-off
(Parameters M 01, M 02, M 04). F(new) = F(0ld) + FAK * Error
2 Restart batch through START command.
F =Batch cut-off point I 02
3 Change-over point from full feed to dribble
feed FM = SET - A - F is reached. Signals FAK =Adaption factor I 03
Full Feed and Dribble Feed change levels. (see Parameter)
A and F are the pre-act cut-off points
(Parameters I 01 und I 02).
4 Cut-off point HM = SET - A Release Signal:
is reached and batch is complete.
Belt drive cuts off. Pending release signal acts as STOP command.

So as to avoid excess feed, prefeeder shuts Alarm:


down as soon as differential amount M (TZ) is
reached (M 04 = NO). Batch is interrupted (motor and prefeeder cut off
immediately). Remedy fault, acknowledge error
M(TZ) = I * TZ/3600 message and restart..

I = Current feed rate filtered through Power DOWN:


display filter G 01
TZ = Parameter M 02 Batch mode is cut off. Counter readings and values of
amounts fed remain stored for an unlimited period of
5 Belt tracking and end of material flow. time. Resume batching with Preselect Batch
If Parameters H and V are correctly set, function.
setpoint has now been reached. If not, see
Item Adaptation. Abort Batch function:
6. Change-over point from full feed to dribble
feed, if prefeeder is used for feed control Abort batch. Control signal behaviour is the same as
(Parameter N 05 = YES). after STOP command.

Pre-act cut-off point FMS is estimated on the


basis of the mean belt load.

FMS = VM - L * Q - M(TZ)

Q = Belt load displayed (Filter G 04)


L = Material path (M 03)

M(TZ)= See Item 4


0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Details
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 97
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Batching With Clearance

When batch is complete, prefeeder cuts off; belt drive, Parameter Schedule:
after approx. another half belt circuit. Conveyor belt is
empty. Delay for point of discharge should be B 06 START source OP
activated G 06 Belt tracking time Tn ca. 3 s
(N 01 = YES).
Select keyboard for START source (B 06 = DE + T). Tracking time of feed rate acquisition after
Function Next W/Belt Empty automatically activates belt cut-off.
clearance mode. For details, see OPERATION
chapter. N 01 CPD Active YES

The smallest possible actual batch amount Delay for point of discharge
corresponds to the load on belt from weighing platform
to point of feed.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Details Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 98 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

I 01 Batch Dribble Feed kg Sequence:

Change-over point from full feed to dribble 0 Start batch through START command. Belt
feed, e.g. through reduction of feed rate. drive, feeder and totalizing counters start
Enter deviation from cut-off point I 02 (see operating.
Diagram). Normally not used in clearance 1 Abort batch through STOP command.
mode. To avoid excess feed, belt drive continues
I 02 Batch Cut-Off Point kg running for time TZ after prefeeder cut-off
(Parameters M 02, M 04).
Feeder cut-off point. 2 Restart batch through START command.

Suggestion: Initial value 0 3 Changeover point to dribble feed is reached.


Full feed and dribble feed signals change
I 03... See Without Clearance level.
I 07 Belt Empty YES
FM = AM - F
Prerequisite for clearance mode
AM = Cut-off point, see Item 4
M 01 Feeder Active YES F = Parameter I 01, Dribble Feed

Prerequisite for clearance mode


4 Cut-off point AM is reached, feeder cuts off.
Belt drive continues running for time Tab to
enable belt to be unloaded.
M 02 Setting Time sec
AM = SOLL - A - Mg
From 0 to nominal feed rate (see Sequence
and Parameter M 04). A = Parameter I 02, Cut-Off Point
M 03 Feed Distance m Mg = Estimated load on belt between
weighing platform and prefeeder.
Material path from feeder to end of weighing
platform. Mg = L * Q + I * TZ/3600
If CPD is active (N 01 = YES) the length from
platform center to point of discharge (N 02) I = Current feed rate filtered through
has to be added. display filter G 01.
TZ = Parameter M 02.
M 04 Motor STOP Aft. ST YES/NO Q = Current belt load filtered through
display filter G 04
Use M 04 to determine whether belt tracking
is desired after completion of batch or after Tab = TZ + time for another half belt circuit
cut-off. With N 04 = NO, TZ is doubled.
With slow feeders, tracking helps to avoid
excess feed (see Sequence and Diagram). 5. Batching amount reached.

Cut-off command routed between Item 4 and 5 totally


aborts batch.
M 05 Change-Over FF/DF YES/NO
For Adaption, Release, etc.:
Parameter has no effect.
See Batching Without Clearance.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Details
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 99
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Data Flow Diagram

Fig.: Measurement
Parameters:
Note:
Io Nominal Feed Rate B 02 in t/h
In normal INTECONT operation, data flow diagrams
need not be known. Io is reference value for limit values and
service display. Io has no effects on
In special cases, they can be used to trace internal calibration.
normalizations, particulary important for (theoretical)
precalibration. Qo = in kg/m
Vo = in m/s
Io = in t/h
0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Details Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 100 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

L Effective Platform Length C 06 in m

Acquire accurate length and enter.


VS Speed Transducer Characteristic
Value B 04 in I/m

VS determines speed measurement


normalization, thus being relevant for
weighing accuracy.
Fo Load Cell Rated Capacity C 04 in kg

Total of load cell rated capacities. Pivots are


considered as load cells.
Fo = (N +M) * NNENN
NENN = load cell rated capacity
N = number of load cells
M = number of pivots
Fo determines weigher accuracy.

E Load Cell Characteristic Value C 04


in mV

The transmission coefficient is an important


value for calibration.

Ua = Load cell output voltage in mV


Ue = Load cell input voltage in V
= 5 V (10 V)
Fig.: Displays, limit values, analog input F = Load on load cell

Qo Nominal Belt Load D 01 in kg/m CSD load cells E = 2.85 mV/V


HBM load cells E = 2.00 mV/V
Computed by INTECONT, Qo is reference
value for limit values and displays.
With some types, E is not calibrated. For
Nominal platform load QB = Qo L value, see type plate.
L = effective platform length
Vo Nominal Speed B 05 in m/s H Lever Ratio C 06

The lever ratio is decisive for calibration


Reference value for limit values, only relevant accuracy. However, it must not enter into
for calibration of weighers check weight computation.
1. operating without speed measurement or
2. using adaptive belt influence compensation
0837 BIC is used.

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Details
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 101
VBW INTECONT PLUS

elt load results from platform data and belt inclination.

F = Force applied to load cell in kg


QB = Platform load in kg
LWB = See Figure.

With platforms with leaf spring parallel


guidance H = 1.

a Belt Inclination C08 in degr

Enter belt inclination if load cells are mounted Fo= Total of load cell in kg
right-angled to belt. With vertically mounted rated capacities
load cells, degree is always 0 E= Load cell characteristic value in m/mV
QPRF Effective Check Weight C 08 in kg
GK= Device constant
This weight serves for check of theoretical
calibration.
As effective check weight, enter platform load
simulated by check weight.
For check weight factor f, see Spec Sheet. Ue = Load cell input voltage in V
QPRF = f * Check Weight a= Angle in degr

Belt speed is computed from speed transducer output


KOR Range Correction D 02 frequency.

D 02 is primarily used to calibrate results of a


material check. This parameter exclusively
acts on belt load measuring branch.
The product from Q and V is feed rate I.
Analog Output:
I = Q * V * 3600s/f in kg/h
For tare parameters to be accurately calibrated, range
correction takes place before taring. If range
normalization QN is modified (Parameters KOR, Fo,
etc.), tare parameters are automatically converted so
ANH << = 1 >> = 20mA that zero point is maintained.
X = I, V or Q (see Fig. Analog Output)

Operating Principle - Summary Weighers without Speed Measurement:

Load cell output voltage Va is amplified and converted For setting program LB, a frequency of V0 * VS is
into digital value d. internally generated. If one of the two parameters is
As transmission factor A0 of AD converter and load changed, call LB program again. Only then all other
cell data are known to INTECONT, load on load cell setting programs will run over integer belt circuits.
can be computed from the output voltage. 0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Details Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 102 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Connection Diagram

Base Card

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Details
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 103
VBW INTECONT PLUS

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Details Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 104 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Option Card

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Details
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 105
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Namur Inputs n Cable Fastening

8 mA = Short circuit
1.65...8 mA = Level 0
0.1...1.65 mA= Level 1 (sensor covered)
0,1 mA = Cable breakage

Option Card:

The option card is attached to the INTECONT cover.


Signal exchange with base card is via a pluggable flat
cable connector.
If pulled off, system behaves as if no option card was
present and only the operating functions and
parameters of the base card can be used.

Cabling Hints In the rear wall of the INTECONT, under each


connector, several slots are provided. The
n All cables are led to the device from the rear upper slot pair is reserved for the cable clamp
(front-of-panel mounting housing) or from below which presses the shielded cable against the
(flush mounting housing) and connected with rear wall. The shield needs not be separately
special connectors. Connectors cannot be connected. The lower cut-out serves for
confused. accommodation of a pull relief, e.g. by cable
binders.
n The INTECONT is isolated from the mounting
surface by its plastic housing.
The rear earthing connector is internally connected
with the electronics zero potential.
The protective ground used requires to be hum- and Attention!
transient-free.
The power supply zero potential (0V ext.) is not Connectors to base card require to be plugged-in
connected to the earthing connector. In general, no with screwed connections up; connectors to option
earthing is required. card, with screwed connections down.

n Ensure that no leakage currents are conducted over n Intecont rear view: Connectors
cable shields. Therefore shields are applied to one
side of INTECONT. The load cell housing is not
connected with shields.
Shields of data cables to host computer are
connected to ground on either side.

n The consumers connected to the relay and pulse


outputs require to be radioshielded, e.g. by
suppressor diodes or RC elements.

n Analog outputs
Long cables, particularly to frequency transducers,
can interact on analog outputs. We suggest to use
an isolating amplifier.

n Make sure the space between power and


measuring cables, if run in parallel, is 0.30 m.
If this is not possible lay measuring cable in steel
conduit. The same holds if the measuring cable is
laid over free stretches or close to powerful 0837
transmitters (e.g. broadcasting stations).

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Details Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 106 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Weighing Platforms

1. Effective Platform Length Multi-Idler Platform

The effective platform length is an important value for


calibration. Determined by platform design, it can n Buckled Platform
normally be taken from Spec Sheet. However, we
recommend to remeasure length and to enter the e.g. BMK type
exact value into parameter.
The hatched areas shows the distribution of load on The platform consists of two sections. In its center,
platform. force is applied to load cell. Instead of weighed
idlers, a two-sectional weighing table can also be
n Single-Idler Platform used.

e.g. BEZ, BED types

Platform load is applied to load cell via a weighed


idler. This can be done by using a lever system or,
with no levers, by leaf spring parallel guidance.

Buckled Platform

Single-Idler
Platform

n Multi-Idler Platform

e.g. BMP, BMC types

Various weighed idler are connected to form a


mechanical unit.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Details
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 107
VBW INTECONT PLUS

n One-sided mounting of total belt 2. Check Weight QPRF

Simulating a certain belt load, the check weight is


used for control of weighing system. It can act on
weighing platform direct or via lever system.
The weight to be entered into INTECONT is not the
actual weight, but the weight acting on platform.

Effective check weight QPRF is the platform load in


kg simulated by the check weight

Single-Idler Platform

a) Parallel Leaf Spring Mounting

Theoretically, the check weight can be applied


to any point of the mechanical platform
equipment. Applied weight QP is active always.
One-sided
mounting QPRF = OP

b) Joint Mounting (e.g. Universal Spring Joint):


Lg = Length up to mid hillside

tan(a) 0,018 a

Angle a= 0 : K = 0
Angle a = neg :K = neg
0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Details Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 108 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

n Multi-Idler Platform 3. Conveyor Belt Inclination


a) Total platform mounted on load cells:
In certain cases, the inclination of conveyor belt has to
be entered into parameter. Decisive is the load cell
QPRF = QP
mounting position.

b) Joint Mounting a) Right-angled to conveyor belt

See Single-Idler Platform Enter angle a into parameter. Load cell is loaded
with N = Q * cos a.

n Buckled Platform

QPRF = QP

n Normally, check weight acts on center.

n One-sided mounting of total belt

LPG
QPRF = QP
LWZ
b) Vertical to conveyor belt
With inclined belts, consider extension, or shortening,
of calibration lever, if any, in accordance with Enter 0 as angle a. Load cells are loaded with full
single-idler platform. force Q.

Chain Calibration Weight:

If a chain curtain is placed over the platform area, the


total weight of chains in weighing area is the effective
check weight.

QPRF = n * Lg * s

N= Number of chains

Lg= Overall belt length in m

s= Chain weight per m in kg/m

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Details
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 109
VBW INTECONT PLUS

Printer Connectivity

Interface : Serial (see Chapter Technical Switch


Data). 1-1 : OFF 8-bit message
1-2 : OFF No parity bit
Character map: ISO-Latin-1 (ISO-8859-1) 1-3 : ON, OFF Even/odd
Cable : The connection diagram holds 1-4 : OFF Positive edge
for EPSON and CITIZEN 1-5...8 : OFF, ON, OFF, OFF 9600 baud
printers. 2-1...6 : ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF
(default)

Use Parameter J 01 to set baud rate to 9600. On the


right side of printer, there are two additional DIP
switches. Diagram view corresponds to top of printer.

Fig. EPSON Printer

Switch
1-1 : OFF Character spacing 10 CPI
1-2 : OFF Zero with no backslash
1-3 : ON Graphics character set
Fig.: Printer Cable 1-4 : OFF Auto hyphenation activated
1-5 : ON Normal print speed
1-6...8 : ON, ON, ON USA
EPSON Printer: LX 850 2-1 : ON Page length 12 inch
2-2 : OFF No cut sheet
2-3 : OFF Jump over perforation
2-4 : OFF No auto line feed

Information on switch position can be printed by using


the printer self-test function. (Press line feed key while
starting printer).

CITIZEN Printer: 120D

Fig. EPSON Interface Fig. Serial Interface

The interface board is equipped with 2 DIP switches


0837
used for selection of serial message base data.

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Details Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 110 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

13 Replacement Instructions

Replacing INTECONT PLUS FIP > INTECONT PLUS VEG

INTECONT PLUS, type VEG, is equipped with added functions for INTECONT PLUS, type FIP. Logical
inputs/outputs can now be assigned to hardware at will. Please also check all connectors with relevant
parameter assignment.
When using our convenient replacement set (ordering no. V036910.B01), hardware is adapted by plugging.
The EasyServe setting program supplied enables easy assignment and transfer of all software parameters.

FIP base card connection diagram

FIP option card connection diagram

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Replacement Instructions
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 111
VBW INTECONT PLUS

The FIP base and option cards connection diagrams Load Cell
indicate for every digital input and output the relevant
INTECONT VEG parameter numbers used for
FIP Physical Signal VEG
distribution on physical signals.
X5 3 OUT1 X7 3
The tables below compares the connector X5 4 REF1 X7 4
assignments of FIP and VEG for all physical signals. X5 5 IN2 X7 6
X5 6 IN1 X7 5
X5 7 REF2 X7 7
X5 8 OUT2 X7 8
Digital Outputs

FIP Physical Signal VEG Attention:


Signals IN1 and IN2 are swapped between FIP and
X1 1,2 DA1 X1 1,2 VEG. (VEG is compatible to DISOCONT).
X1 3,4 DA2 X1 3,4
X1 5,6 DA3 X1 5,6
X6 1,2 DA4 X8 1,2
X6 3,4 DA5 X8 3,4 Power Supply
X6 5,6 DA6 X8 5,6
X6 7,8 DA7 X8 7,8 FIP Physical Signal VEG
X6 9,10 DA8 X8 9,10
X2 1 0V ext X2 1
X2 2 24V ext X2 2
Digital Inputs X2 3 ext. 0V supply X2 3
X2 4 ext. 24V supply X2 4
FIP Physical Signal VEG

X3 1,2 DE1 X3 1,2 Printer


X9 1,2 DE2 X3 3,4
X9 3,4 DE3 X6 6,7 FIP Physical Signal VEG
- DE4 X9 1,2
- DE5 X9 3,4 X8 1 Screen X10 1
X3 5,6 Sensor = (DE6) X3 5,6 X8 2 TX X10 2
X5 1,2 V1 (Tacho 1) = DE7 X7 1,2 X8 3 RX X10 3
X3 3,4 V2 (Tacho2) -
Pulse Output
Analog Inputs/Outputs
FIP Physical Signal VEG
FIP Physical Signal VEG
X9 5 24V X6 8
X9 9,10 A01 X6 4,5 X9 6 Open collector X6 9
- A02 X9 5,6 X9 7 Open emitter X6 10
X9 8 0V X6 11
- AI X6 1,2,3

With VEG, fieldbus is connected via separate fieldbus


cards (FIP: Connector X7). See Fieldbus Manual
BVH2220.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Replacement Instructions Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 112 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW

Connector Size

FIP

X1 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 6 pins


X2 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 4 pins
X3 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 7 pins
X5 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 8 pins
X6 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 8 or 10 pins
X7 SUB-D: 9 pins
X8 SUB-D: 9 pins
X9 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 12 pins

VEG

X1 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 6 pins


X2 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 4 pins
X3 Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 6 pins
X4 SUB-D: 9 pins
X5 Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 7 pins
X6 Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 11 pins
X7 Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 8 pins
X8 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 10 pins
X9 Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 9 pins
X10 Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 7 pins

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Replacement Instructions
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 113
VBW INTECONT PLUS

This page left intentionally blank.

0837

Transmission to third parties and reproduction of


Replacement Instructions Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
BV-H2214 GB 114 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS
INTECONT Opus
INTECONT Satus
Fieldbus Description

BV-H2220GB
PASS - Service you can rely on.
Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world

Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive
service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to
seamless support across the entire product life cycle.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever and
wherever you need us. It doesnt matter where you are, our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best
in worldwide, personal, comprehensive service.

During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on hand to analyse problems and failures. Look at
www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck Process Location.

Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System provides you with the
best service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions? Then our, the modular service system PASS,
is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections through to full service. Interested? Then
find out more about the individual components at www.schenckprocess.com/en/service .

Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline in Germany


Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock
to deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.

+49 172 6 501700 Heavy and Light excluding Static Weighing Equipment

+49 171 2 251195 Transport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment

by Schenck Process GmbH, 2008


Pallaswiesenstrae 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany
+49 61 51-15 31 0
www.schenckprocess.com
All information is given without obligation. All specifications are subject to change.

Note: Translation of the original instructions


Table of Contents

1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ 1
1.1 Validity Range ........................................................................................................ 1

2 FIELDBUS DATA............................................................................... 2
2.1 Data Segments ....................................................................................................... 2

2.2 Units ........................................................................................................................ 2

2.3 Numeric Representation ....................................................................................... 2

2.4 User Data Construction......................................................................................... 4


2.4.1 FIXED Mode...................................................................................................... 4
2.4.1.1 FIXED Mode Detailed Message Sample................................................. 7
2.4.2 General User Data Construction ....................................................................... 8
2.4.2.1 Message Construction................................................................................ 9
2.4.2.2 Parameter Transfer .................................................................................. 11
2.4.2.3 General User Data Construction Detailed Samples.............................. 13

2.5 User Data Diagnosis ............................................................................................ 15


2.5.1 Serial connection............................................................................................. 15
2.5.2 Connection via Ethernet.................................................................................. 17

2.6 Lists of Cyclic Data.............................................................................................. 19


2.6.1 Explanations on Data Lists.............................................................................. 19
2.6.2 Commands ...................................................................................................... 20
2.6.3 Preset Values in Floating Point Format .......................................................... 22
2.6.4 Preset Values in Integer Format (Modbus) ..................................................... 23
2.6.5 Status Information ........................................................................................... 24
2.6.6 Measurement Values in Floating Point Format............................................... 32
2.6.7 Measurement Values in Integer Format (Modbus) ......................................... 35
2.6.8 Values in Long Integer Format....................................................................... 36
2.6.9 Events ............................................................................................................. 37

3 PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................. 38
3.1 Commissioning Guideline .................................................................................. 38

3.2 Profibus Module Functionality ........................................................................... 38

3.3 User Data Construction....................................................................................... 39

3.4 Settings on DP-Slave (INTECONT)..................................................................... 39

3.5 Settings on Profibus DP Master ......................................................................... 40

3.6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting......................................................................... 41

3.7 Profibus Module (VPB020V) ............................................................................... 42

3.8 Profibus module (VPB8020)................................................................................ 43

3.9 For Further Reading ............................................................................................ 44

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 I


Schenck Process
Table of Contents

4 DEVICENET ..................................................................................... 45
4.1 Commissioning Guideline ...................................................................................45

4.2 DeviceNet Module Functionality .........................................................................45

4.3 User Data Construction .......................................................................................45

4.4 Settings on DeviceNet Slave (INTECONT) .........................................................46

4.5 Settings on DeviceNet Master.............................................................................46

4.6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting .........................................................................47

4.7 DeviceNet Module (VCB020V) .............................................................................48

4.8 DeviceNet Modul (VCB8020V) .............................................................................49

4.9 For Further Reading .............................................................................................50

5 MODBUS.......................................................................................... 51
5.1 Commissioning Guideline ...................................................................................51

5.2 Modbus Module Functionality.............................................................................51

5.3 Data Format...........................................................................................................51

5.4 Function Codes (FC) ............................................................................................52

5.5 Transmission Protection .....................................................................................52

5.6 Error Codes...........................................................................................................52

5.7 Station Addresses ................................................................................................52

5.8 User Data ...............................................................................................................53


5.8.1 Process Values ................................................................................................53
5.8.2 Parameters ......................................................................................................53

5.9 Cyclic Data Exchange Via Modbus.....................................................................53

5.10 Sample Messages...............................................................................................53

5.11 Settings on Modbus Slave (INTECONT)...........................................................54

5.12 Settings on Modbus Master ..............................................................................55

5.13 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting .......................................................................55

5.14 Serial Bus Module (VSS021V - applies to VEG) .............................................56

5.15 Connection for serial interface S3 (RS485- VKG) ...........................................58

5.16 tie-in diagram S3 as RS485-2-wire....................................................................58

5.17 For Further Reading ...........................................................................................58

II BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Table of Contents

6 ETHERNET ...................................................................................... 59
6.1 Ethernet Settings ................................................................................................. 59

6.2 Checking Station Addresses .............................................................................. 60

6.3 Modbus-TCP/IP .................................................................................................... 61


6.3.1 Commissioning Guideline ............................................................................... 61
6.3.2 Ethernet Module Functions ............................................................................. 61
6.3.3 Fieldbus Mode................................................................................................. 61
6.3.4 Station Addresses ........................................................................................... 62
6.3.5 Function Codes (FC)....................................................................................... 62
6.3.6 Transmission Protection.................................................................................. 62
6.3.7 Error Codes ..................................................................................................... 62
6.3.8 Data Formats................................................................................................... 63
6.3.9 Process Values ............................................................................................... 63
6.3.10 Parameters.................................................................................................... 63
6.3.11 Data Exchange Overview.............................................................................. 63
6.3.12 Message Samples......................................................................................... 64
6.3.13 Settings on Modbus/TCP Slave (INTECONT) .............................................. 64
6.3.14 Settings on Modbus/TCP Master .................................................................. 65
6.3.15 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting .................................................................... 65
6.3.16 Ethernet Bus Module (VET020V VEG) ...................................................... 66
6.3.17 Ethernet connection VKG.............................................................................. 67
6.3.18 For Further Reading...................................................................................... 67

6.4 Ethernet/IP ............................................................................................................ 68


6.4.1 Commissioning Guidelines.............................................................................. 68
6.4.2 Ethernet Module Functions ............................................................................. 68
6.4.3 Fieldbus Mode................................................................................................. 68
6.4.4 User Data Construction................................................................................... 68
6.4.5 Settings on Ethernet/IP-Slave (INTECONT) ................................................... 68
6.4.6 Configuration of the network in RSLogix 5000" ............................................. 70
6.4.7 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting....................................................................... 71
6.4.8 Ethernet Bus Module (VET022V) for VEG...................................................... 72

6.5 Ethernet connection VKG ................................................................................... 73


6.5.1 For Further Reading........................................................................................ 73

7 APPLICATION EXAMPLES............................................................. 74
7.1 Zeroing and Taring Weighfeeders / Belt Weighers .......................................... 74

7.2 Batching via fieldbus........................................................................................... 75

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 III


Schenck Process
Table of Contents

IV BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Overview

1 Overview
Before putting into operation one of the protocols described below, always read Item
Fieldbus Data and the protocol-specific items.
Decisive for the further procedure is the User Data Construction item. You can select:
! FIXED mode or
! General user data construction

If you arrive at the conclusion that the FIXED mode is the right mode for your application,
you can skip all the other information on IDs and parameters.
The FIXED mode means you need less time for orientation and it makes it much easier to
use the fieldbus connection. You only have to read the FIXED mode Chapter in Sections
1.1-1.4 as well as the sections on diagnosis and troubleshooting wherever necessary.

You can find information on the web server in document BVI2060AA.

1.1 Validity Range


This item describes all data that can be transferred using the various fieldbus protocols.
The data basis is the same for all fieldbuses. Special features are detailed at the protocol-
specific items.

The Fieldbus Data item holds for the following protocols:

Protocol See:
Profibus DP Chapter 3
DeviceNet Chapter 4
Modbus Chapter 5
Modbus-TCP/IP and Ethernet/IP Chapter 6

For description of protocol S5-RK512 (3964R), see manual FH458.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 1


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2 Fieldbus Data

2.1 Data Segments


The INTECONT system distinguishes the following cyclic data:
! Commands (bit or byte information)
! Setpoints (floating point values)
! Status information (bit or byte information)
! Measurement values (floating point values)
! Long (INT32) values (integer values)

2.2 Units

INTECONT uses two different unit systems:


! SI units
! NON-SI units
Changeover takes place using the Units parameter.
For the fieldbuses, this means:
! Selection SI lets you transfer all unit values in "m, kg and sec"
! Selection NON-SI transfers your values in "ft, lb and sec".

2.3 Numeric Representation

Floating Point Values


INTECONT readies measurement values, setpoints and some parameters in the form of
floating point numbers in the IEEE-754 4-byte format. Depending on protocol and
parameter, these can be converted into another floating point format. For details, see
individual protocol descriptions.
Transmission always starts with MSB.

Example for transmission of value 150.5 in IEEE format (indicating the line sequence):

Byte 1: Byte 2: Byte 3: Byte 4:


Sign/Exponent Mantissa 1 Mantissa 2 Mantissa 3

0x43 0x16 0x80 0x00

Sample floating point numbers


Number IEEE format (HEX) Siemens-KG format (HEX)
1.0 3F800000 01400000
10.0 41200000 04500000
100.0 42C80000 07640000
1000.0 447A0000 0A7D0000

2 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Data (double) words

Data words are standard transmitted using the Motorola format (high byte followed by low
byte).
Depending on protocol and parameter, another byte sequence can be set. For details, see
individual protocol descriptions.

Word oder / Byte order

Data type MSB LSB


MSB LSB
Int 32 / LONG
0 0 MSB LSB
Int 16

Bit information

Bits are comprised to form words (Modbus, Modbus/TCP) or double words (Profibus,
DeviceNet). The line sequence is as follows:

Ex.: Command ID 0x0140 Comm4_HI Comm4_LO Comm5_HI Comm5_LO


Ex.: Status ID 0x02F0 Status2_HI Status2_LO Status3_HI Status3_LO

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 3


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.4 User Data Construction

As mentioned above, INTECONT readies two process images:


! FIXED mode or
! General user data construction.
The data of the Fixed Mode Parameter parameter blocks are transferred to set positions
between the host system and INTECONT in the FIXED mode. Parameters cannot be
transferred. However, you also do not have to study the principle of data exchange via
"general user data structure". This is where you can transfer any data you want in any
order you want including the equipment parameters. You pay for this flexibility at the price
of devoting more time and effort to orientation in terms of the data scope and type of
processing.
The user data structures of this section also apply to the PROFIBUS, DeviceNet and
EtherNet/IP protocols. The Modbus, or Modbus/TCP, protocol is used to transfer
continuous data ranges from Master to scale and vice versa (see protocol-specific items).

2.4.1 FIXED Mode

The data of the FIXED mode are also adapted to each scale type. In any event, the
structure of the data packages as shown in the figure below is identical. Each value is
always the size of one data double word (4 bytes). Values not used are filled with zero. For
detailed description of commands and status values, refer to the lists of cyclic data given at
the end of the Fieldbus Data item.

NOTE
In preset value 1 (commands 4 + 5) the release bit (in terms of a fieldbus release)
serving for interface monitoring must always be set statically. If this bit is not set,
the subsequent preset values are not evaluated and HOST communication fault is
set.

4 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

The table below includes all values transferred with the particular scale type:

Preset values Fixed Mode 1 and 2


VLW20600 VBW20600 VDB20600 VMD20600 VDM20600
Byte-No. ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert
1-4 140 Commands 4+5 140 Commands 4+5 140 Commands 4+5 140 Commands 4+5 140 Commands 4+5
5-8 160 Commands 6+7 160 Commands 6+7 160 Commands 6+7 160 Commands 6+7 160 Commands 6+7
9-12 180 Commands 8+9 180 Commands 8+9 180 Kommando 8+9 180 Commands 8+9 180 Commands 8+9
13-16 250 Absolute setpoint [kg/h] 254 Make-Up setpoint [kg] 250 Absolute setpoint [kg/h] 250 Absolute setpoint [kg/h] 254 Make-Up setpoint [kg]
17-20 252 Batch setpoint [kg] 252 Batch setpoint [kg] 252 Batch setpoint [kg] 252 Batch setpoint [kg] 252 Batch setpoint [kg]
21-24 0 256 Batch No. 0 256 Batch No. 256 Batch No.
25-28 0 0 0 254 Make-up Setpoint [kg] 0
29-32 0 0 0 0 0
Read values Fixed Mode 1
VLW20600 VBW20600 VDB20600 VMD20600 VDM20600
Byte-Nr. ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert
1-4 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3
5-8 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5
9-12 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event
13-16 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h]
17-20 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg]
21-24 760 Fill weight [kg] 758 Belt load [kg/m] 758 Belt load [kg/m] 75A Measured load [kg] 75A Measured load [kg]
25-28 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 75C Belt speed [m/s] 75C Belt speed [m/s] 75E Speed [1/min] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg]]
29-32 766 Actual Setpoint [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 766 Actual Setpoint [kg/h] 766 Actual Setpoint [kg/h] 768 Actual Setpoint [kg/h]

Read values Fixed Mode 2


VLW20600 VBW20600 VDB20600 VMD20600 VMD20600
Byte-Nr. ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert
1-4 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3
5-8 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5
9-12 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event
13-16 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h]
17-20 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg]
21-24 760 Fill [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg]
25-28 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg]
29-32 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg] 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg] 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg] 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg] 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg]

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 5


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

6 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

From the programme statuses


VBW20600-08
VDB20600-08
VDM20600-05
VLW20600-07
VMD20600-08
there is only one FIXED mode. The values that are then transferred in FIXED mode
should be set in the parameter block Fixed Mode Parameter. The default values
correspond to the values in the table for fixed mode 1.

2.4.1.1 FIXED Mode Detailed Message Sample

INTECONT parameters (scale type: VLW)

Configuration FIXED-1
Floating point format IEEE format

Master->Slave Bytes (hex) Meaning (ID value, hex) Current value


Bytes 1-4 00 0C 00 00 Commands 4+5 (0140) Event acknowledged, release set
Bytes 5-8 00 00 00 00 Commands 6+7 (0160) No command active
Bytes 9-12 00 00 00 01 Commands 8+9 (0180) START keyboard mode set
Bytes 13-16 43 16 80 00 Setpoint (0250) 150.5 kg/hr
Bytes 17-20 42 C8 00 00 Batch setpoint (0252) 100 kg
Bytes 21-32 ZERO Standby

Slave->Master Bytes (hex) Meaning (ID value, hex) Current value


Bytes 1-4 01 02 00 00 Status 2+3 (02F0) Normal mode, no release
Bytes 5-8 00 02 00 04 Status 4+5 (0310) Filling system, fill level < Min
Bytes 9-12 13 18 00 00 Most significant error (0610) Event S9 ackn., Warning2
Bytes 13-16 42 C8 00 00 Feed rate actual value (0750) 100 kg/hr
Bytes 17-20 44 9A 40 00 Totalizing counter 1 (0752) 1234 kg
Bytes 21-24 43 AC 80 00 Bin level F (0760) 345 kg
Bytes 25-28 45 F6 90 00 Totalizing counter 2 (0754) 7890 kg
Bytes 29-32 42 C8 00 00 Effective setpoint (0766) 100 kg/hr

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 7


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.4.2 General User Data Construction

Since there is no specific Weighing profile, data construction uses the existing
Variable Speed Drives profile.
In this profile, user data construction for the cyclic channel is called Parameter
Process Data Object (PPO).

The guideline determines the user data construction for drives a Master can use to
access the drive slaves by means of cyclic data exchange. User data construction in
cyclic data exchange comprises two ranges which can be transmitted in every
message:

! Process Data Range (PZD), i.e. control words and setpoints, or status
information and actual values
! Parameter Range (PKW) for read/write of parameter values, e.g. read-out of
information on parameter characteristics (MIN/MAX values, etc.).

The PPO type used to address the scale from Master can be configured at the time of
bus system commissioning. The PPO type is selected as a function of the scale task
in the automation environment and used to control the scale in the automation
environment, e.g. Start/Stop, Enter Setpoints. The parameter range enables the user
to freely access all scale parameters with the use of the bus system. Thus, further
information for scale visualization can be called up from a host system, e.g. a PC, with
no adverse effects on the efficiency of process data transmission.
All messages used in cyclic data transmission have the following basic construction:

Protocol frame Parameters (PKW) User data Protocol frame


(header) optional Process data (PDR) (trailer)

General message construction

PPO types
You can select the following PPO types:
! NO_PARA_ID: User data without a parameter range and three defined preset
values and as many as 6 additional reading values selectable by ID
! PARA_ID: User data with a parameter range, two preset values and four reading
values.
! PARA_6ID: User data with a parameter range with three defined preset values
and as many as 6 additional reading values selectable by ID
This process image is only available in connection with Hardware VxB8020.

Parameter range (PKW)


The PKW message part (Parameter Code Value) can be used to monitor and/or
change any scale parameter. The requisite mechanisms of order/reponse IDs are
described at the Parameter Transfer item.

Process data range (PDR)


Using the process data, commands and preset values (Master to scale) or status
words and actual values ( scale to Master response) can be transmitted.
Transmitted process data are immediately effective.

8 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.4.2.1 Message Construction


The figure below shows the basic construction of user data in the INTECONT system.
The first line shows the message from bus master to scale; the second, the scale
reponse.

The user data structure is fixed and the data content (IDs and values) is variable.

The size of the user data part of a package is 32 bytes in the process images
NO_PARA_ID + PARA_ID. If the DeviceNet or Ethernet/IP protocol is used, 32 should
be entered as the number of bytes (as the produced and consumed connection size).
The configuration telegram guarantees the correct length information in Profibus .
Unused bytes are filled with the value zero.

Starting with the program versions

1 VBW20600-08
2 VDB20600-08
3 VDM20600-05
4 VLW20600-07
5 VMD20600-08
the process image PARA_6ID is also supported. The structure corresponds to
NO_PARA_ID + up-stream parameter block. Another condition is that a
communication module is used with a firmware version.
This process image is only available in connection with Hardware VxB8020.
You can see the version under service values SW_FB.
The process image of the control system to INTECONT is 38 bytes long in this case
and 40 bytes are transmitted in the opposite direction.

Sample
Data transmission without parameters with 3 preset values, 6 variable
user-defined identifications (IDs) representation HEX

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 9


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Note

! The preset IDs from Master to scale must originate from the Command or Preset
value ranges. It is possible to preset multiple setpoints (feed rate and batch
setpoint) or multiple commands with different IDs in one and the same cycle.
! If one ID is zero, respective value is not evaluated..
! If all bytes are set to zero in the presetting message (bus Master to INTECONT),
fieldbus communication fault is set on INTECONT. INTECONT interprets this state
as failure of the bus Master's host CPU whilst the communication processor in
Master is active. The INTECONT timeout monitoring cannot compensate this state
since formally valid data packages are transferred still. At least one preset ID must
have a valid value unequal to zero.
! Control and status information is comprised in 4-byte packages. The IDs assigned
to blocks are highlighted in data description. Only these IDs may be used here. If
a different ID is used, data are rejected and an error message is output.

! In the response message, status and actual value are identified by their positions
in message. The fixed status has ID 0x2F0; the actual value, ID 0x750.

! Through addition of (read) IDs in Master --> scale message, you can cause the
scale to enter the desired values into the response message. Value sequence
corresponds to the ID sequence. If IDs of the Preset value or Command ranges
are entered, the value preset last is reread.

! If an ID is identified as wrong, corresponding value in the response is set to zero.

Sample Data transmission with additional parameter block

The (grey) parameter block always precedes the residual data.

Master --> scale message

PKE IND PWE1 PWE2 ID ID Ordering list


Preset Preset value 1 Preset Preset value 2 (read IDs)
value 1 value 2

Scale response

PKE IND PWE1 PWE2 Status infos (2+3) Actual value Values as per ordering list
(4 bytes) (4 bytes)

Note

Parameter evaluation requires considerable expenditure. We suggest to limit data


exchange to parameters of the FLOAT type.

For detailed message samples, see end of item 1.5.

10 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.4.2.2 Parameter Transfer


Parameter block (PKW)

Parameter block (PKW), 4 words


PKE (1st word) IND (2nd word) PWE (3rd and 4th words)
High Low PWE1 PWE2

Basic construction of parameter block

Parameter ID (PKE),

1st word The parameter ID (PKE) is always a 16-bit value.


Bits 0 to 12 (PNU) include the number of the desired parameter.
Bits 13 to 15 (AK) include the order or response ID.
For the order message (Master; scale), the meaning of the order ID
is shown in table.

For the response message (scale ; Master), the meaning of the


response ID is shown in table. Depending on order ID, only certain
response IDs can be used.

AK PNU
Bit no. 15 14 13 Bit 0-12

Details of parameter ID (PKE)

Order ID Meaning Pos. response Neg. response


0 No order 0 -
1 Request current 2 7
parameter value (double
word)
3 Write (change) parameter 2 7
value (double word)
4 Order description element 2 7
(double word)

Order IDs (AK) Master station > INTECONT

Response ID Meaning
0 No order
2 Transfer current parameter value / event group (double word)
7 Order cannot be executed (error number in PWE2)

Response IDs (AK) INTECONT > Master station

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 11


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Parameter index (IND)


2nd word
The array sub-index (in PROFIBUS profile simply called sub-index) is
an 8-bit value and transferred upon cyclic data exchange using PPOs
in the most significant byte (bits 8 to 15) of parameter index (IND).
The less significant byte (bits 0 to 7) always has zero value.

IND function
If an order transfers a sub-index with values between 1 and 254, the
desired index of the selected parameter is transferred. For meanings
of single parameter indices, please see the table below.
When a description element is processed, the number of the desired
element is transferred.

Index Meaning
0 Default value
4 Min. value
8 Max. value
12 Unit index (1st word), after-comma places (2nd word)

Index in parameter description (IND) most significant byte of parameter index

Parameter value (PWE)


3rd and 4th words
The parameter values (PWE) are always transferred in form of a
double word (32 bits). A PPO message can transfer only one
parameter value at a time.
A 32-bit parameter value consists of PWE1 (most significant word, 3rd
word) and PWE2 (less significant word, 4th word).
A 16-bit parameter value is transferred in PWE2 (less significant
word, 4th word). Set PWE1 (most significant word, 3rd word) to 0 value
on Master.

Bits 0 ... 15: Parameter value with 16-bit parameter, or Low portion with
32-bit parameter

Bits 16 ... 31: Value = 0 with 16-bit parameters, or High portion with 32-bit
parameter

Error number Meaning


1 Inadmissible parameter number (parameter not available or preset
value wrong, e.g. MIN/MAX exceeded up/down)
2 MIN/MAX value exceeded up/down
3 No access right
4 Order not possible in current operating state of scale
5 Order not implemented
Error numbers

Error number (PWE2)

If the response ID has value 7 (order cannot be executed), parameter value 2 (PWE2)
includes an error number specified in table.

12 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Order/response processing rules

An order and/or response can refer to a single parameter only.


The Master must repeat the order until receipt of relevant response.
The Master recognises the response on the given order through:
! evaluation of response ID
! evaluation of parameter number PNU
! if necessary, evaluation of parameter index IND
! if necessary, evaluation of parameter value PWE.

The complete order must be sent in one message; splitted order messages are not
admitted. The same applies to the response.
If the response message is repeated, the scale responds with the current values.
If no information from PWK interface are needed in cyclic operation (only PZD data
matter), set the order ID to No Order.
For samples, see item below.

2.4.2.3 General User Data Construction Detailed Samples


Sample 1

GSD module: "NO_PARA_ID"


INTECONT parameters Configuration: NO_PARA_ID
Process image length Master -> Slave : 30 bytes, Slave -> Master: 32 bytes
Floating point format Siemens-KG-Format

Sample Master->Slave process image:

Bytes 1+2 0250 ID for "Write feed rate setpoint


Bytes 3-6 0A 7D 00 00 Setpoint 1000.0 kg/hr
Bytes 7+8 0140 ID for "Commands 4+5"
Bytes 9-1 00 41 00 00 Reset control value for scale start and counter 1
Bytes 13+14 0000 Standby
Bytes 15-18 00 41 00 00 Reset control value for scale start and counter 1 (ID=0: not active)
Bytes 19+20 0752 ID to request counter 1 reading
Bytes 21+22 075C ID to request belt speed in m/s
Bytes 23+24 0754 ID to request counter 2 reading
Bytes 25+26 0758 ID to request belt load in kg/m
Bytes 27+28 0000 Standby
Bytes 29+30 0000 Standby

Sample Slave->Master process image:

Bytes 1-4 01 02 00 00 Always status messages to ID 02F0


Bytes 5-8 00 00 00 00 Always feed rate actual value kg/hr, ID=0750
Bytes 9-12 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 19+20, i.e. counter 1 reading

Bytes 13-16 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 21+22, i.e. belt speed


Bytes 17-20 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 23+24, i.e. counter 2 reading
Bytes 21-24 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 25+26, i.e. belt load
Bytes 25-28 00 00 00 00 Standby
Bytes 29-32 00 00 00 00 Standby

Bytes 1-4 status messages: set are "Normal mode and No release bits

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 13


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Sample 2 (preset parameter)

GSD module: PARA_ID


INTECONT parameters Configuration: PARA_ID
Process image lenght Master -> Slave : 28 bytes, Slave -> Master: 32 bytes
Floating point format IEEE

Sample Master->Slave process image:

Bytes 1-8 7205 0000 4170 0000 Preset parameter "F_Control Min. Feed Index 1" (value =15 %)
Bytes 9+10 0250 ID for "Write feed rate setpoint "
Bytes 11-14 44 7A 00 00 Setpoints 1000.0 kg/hr
Bytes 15+16 0140 ID for "Control"
Bytes 17-20 00 44 00 00 Acknowledge control value for events and reset counter 1
Bytes 21+22 0752 ID to request counter 1 reading
Bytes 23+24 075C ID to request belt speed in m/s
Bytes 25+26 0754 ID to request counter 2 reading
Bytes 27+28 0758 ID to request belt load in kg/m

Sample Slave->Master process image:

Bytes 1-8 5205 0000 4170 0000 Preset parameter value accepted
Bytes 9-12 01 02 00 00 Always status messages to ID 02F0
Bytes 13-16 00 00 00 00 Always feed rate actual value in kg/h, ID=0750
Bytes 17-20 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 19+20, i.e. counter 1 reading
Bytes 21-24 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 21+22, i.e. belt speed
Bytes 25-28 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 23+24, i.e. counter 2 reading
Bytes 29-32 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 25+26, i.e. belt load

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sample 3 (preset parameter with error response)

GSD module PARA_ID


INTECONT parameters Configuration: PARA_ID
Process image lengths Master -> Slave : 28 bytes, Slave -> Master: 32 bytes
Floating point format IEEE

Sample Master->Slave process image:

Bytes 1-8 7205 0000 447a 0000 Preset parameter "F_Control Min." (value =1000 %)
... ... ...

Sample Slave->Master process image:

Bytes 1-8 F205 0000 4170 1000 Preset parameter value not accepted (value > MAX)
... ... ...

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sample 4 (read parameter)

GSD module PARA_ID


INTECONT parameters Configuration: PARA_ID
Process image lengths Master -> Slave : 28 bytes, Slave -> Master: 32 bytes
Floating point format IEEE

Sample Master->Slave process image:

Bytes 1-8 3205 0000 xxxx xxxx Read parameter "F_Control Min" (xxxx = optional value)
... ... ...

Sample Slave->Master process image:

Bytes 1-8 5205 0000 4170 0000 Parameter value = 15%


... ... ...

14 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.5 User Data Diagnosis

2.5.1 Serial connection

You can always carry out the utilisation diagnosis with a serial EasyServe connection.
In addition, you can always use diagnosis with VEG via Ethernet if the optional
VET020V fieldbus card is mounted. The VKG scenario always offers all options.
EasyServe readies a very simple form of bus monitor.

Menu Fieldbus View lets you go to the dialog window.


The following diagnoses are possible:
Display of first 50 characters of last 100 messages in hex format. Display only shows
the mere user data.

The following errors can be recognised:


! Parameter with wrong data format. All floating point numbers are improperly
indicated.
! Faulty IDs preset from Master (see Lists of Cyclic Data)
! Faulty data contents

Not recognised:
!Initialisation error upon connection set-up
!Layer 2 issues upon data exchange

Display of EasyServe monitor (Profibus or DeviceNet)

Representation of Modbus messages (incl Modbus frame)

The figure shows the Modbus telegram depiction (including Modbus frame)

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 15


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Explanations on EasyServe monitor (Profibus sample)

Master transfers command (ID=0x0140) Acknowledge event bit and command


(ID=0x0160). Scale is requested to respond to IDs 0x0758, 0x075E, 0x0310 and
0x0610.

Display meanings

Display shows current fieldbus protocol (see title) and data selected using checkbox.
==> means that Master sends data to scale ( Receive INTECONT).
<== identifies data sent from INTECONT to Master

Selection buttons

Record:
Starts recording on scale

Display:
Data are transferred from scale to PC and then displayed. This process may take
some seconds depending on how many data have been stored yet. Maximum the last
(most recent) 50 messages can be recorded.

Copy:
Lets you mark all (no selection), single or a group of messages by mouse click and
copy them into clipboard. If requested, data can be copied into an editor.

Checkbox:
Lets you select the direction of data and activate a time stamp.

Note
With the Modbus/TCP protocol, the EasyServe monitor displays the data of the
internal interface (scale-EtherNet module). The representation corresponds to the
Modbus sample.

16 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.5.2 Connection via Ethernet

The fieldbus view (as shown below) was extended for Modbus/TCP (VEG) and the
VKG scenario. All data streams are transmitted to EasyServe using the UDP protocol.
Both internal and external data are shown with VEG.

This figure shows the difference between internal and external communication. The
standard EasyServe fieldbus view always shows the internal data (refer to the chapter
on Fieldbus Data).

HOST

External Communication
(TCP)

Communication subassembly
VET2xV
Internal communication
(serial)

Unit

The next figure shows the data of a VEG. The upper row is identical to the standard
diagnose view. The selection fields in the second row allow the selection (filtering) of
particular data after recording has been stopped. The filters are described in detail
below.

Selecting Channel
direction selection

Diagnosing a VEG unit

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 17


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Diagnosing the VKG


These 4 bytes represent the time right down to the millisecond.
The time stamp in front of it is generated by the PC. It is used by
all units that cannot give the exact time.

Note:
17 bytes of internal header data that are not user data follow the time stamp with the
VvB8020 fieldbus cards.

The direction filter enables selection

All
Reception
Transmission

The channel filters show all channels which appear in the record. The following
mean:

All
C(ontroller)
1( ... 3) TCP channel number host

Combining the two channel filters can either filter out the data of two host channels or
the data of a host channel can be combined with the internal data. The host data
contain the 6 Modbus/TCP header bytes.

The copy function transfers the currently selected data into an editor window.

18 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.6 Lists of Cyclic Data

2.6.1 Explanations on Data Lists

There are separate lists for the various data types.


Each list contains the following information:

ID

Used with protocols:


Modbus for data address
Modbus/TCP for data address
Profibus DP for ID indicating the value to be transferred
DeviceNet s. Profibus
EtherNet/IP s. Profibus

The ID value addresses the complete data word. If a bit is to be addressed (as is
possible with MODBUS), add the number before value meaning to the word address.
e.g.: General alarm (data segment "Status")
Word address 0x02F0 + 5 --> bit address 0x02F5

The bold-printed IDs shall be used for:


! Profibus DP
! DeviceNet
They determine the base address of a double word.

Value

The "Value" column states the meaning of the value in the INTECONT system.

Scale types

The Type column indicates whether or not the respective value is available with the
selected scale type. If not available, ZERO value is returned. Preset values relating
to non-existing IDs are not evaluated.

Note:
Non-existing values are possibly available in a later software version (new extension
stage).

Mode (commands only)


Commands can be triggered by level or edge. Letter D(ynamic) indicates that a
change from 0 to 1 triggers the desired action. Letter S(tatic) indicates that the
level determines the function.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 19


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.6.2 Commands

Attention: Special condition or source


parameter for marked values "!". See manual.

(x) Not available with measusing systems


o Reserved for use with EasyServe

Byte- Word- ID ID Rem. Value Mode VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM
Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

For Protocol 3964(R), data block 96 HEX


starts here!
0 0 100 256 ! Command 0 (coded as number)
Feed index (Range 1...4)
1 Century x x x x x

2 1 Command 1 (coded as number)


Year x x x x x
3 Month x x x x x

4 2 120 288 Command 2 (coded as number)


Day x x x x x
5 Hour x x x x x

6 3 Command 3 (coded as number)


Minute x x x x x
7 Second x x x x x

8 4 140 320 Command 4 LO (bit-coded)


! 0 Start Scale (D) x x x x x
! 1 Stop Scale (D) x x x x x
2 Clear Events (D) x x x x x
3 Fieldbus-Release (S) x x x x x
4 Select Volumetric Mode (D) x x x
! 5 Select Gravimetric Mode (D) x x x
6 Reset Totalizer 1 (D) x x x x x
7 Reset Totalizer 2 (D) x x x x x

9 Command 4 HI (bit-coded)
! 8 Volum. Synchronous (D) x x
9 Moisture Corr. ON (D)
A Moisture Corr. OFF (D)
B Meas. Drive OFF (D) x
! C Gate Feedback (S)
D Open Gate Manual (D)
E Stop Gate Manual (D)
F Close Gate Manual (D)

10 5 Command 5 LO (bit-coded)
0 Select Batch (D) x x x x x
1 Deselect Batch (D) x x x x x

20 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Attention: Special condition or source


parameter for marked values "!". See manual.

(x) Not available with measusing systems


o Reserved for use with EasyServe

Byte- Word- ID ID Rem. Value Mode VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM
Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

2 - Abort Batch (D) x x x x x


3 - Next Batch +Clearance (D) x
4 - Make-Up (D) x x x
5 - Emergency Setpoint ON (D)
6 - Emergency Setpoint OFF (D)
7 - Meas. Drive ON (D)

11 Command 5 HI (bit-coded)
8 - Filling Start (D) x
9 - Filling Stop (D) x
A - Emptying Start (D) x
B - Emptying Stop (D) x
C - Init. Hopper Controller (D)
D - Activate Fill Unit (D)
E - Activate Prefeeder (D) x x x x
F - Stop Prefeeder (D) x x x x

12 6 160 352 Command 6 LO (bit-coded)

13 Command 6 HI (bit-coded)

14 7 Command 7 LO (bit-coded)
! 0 - Tare (D) x x x x x
! 1 - Zero Set (D) x x x x
! 2 - Weight Check (D) x x x x
! 3 - Pulses/Revolution (D) x x
! 4 - DAE Adjustment (D) x
! 5 - Linearization P1 (D) x
! 6 - Linearization P2 (D) x
! 7 - Linearization P3 (D) x

15 Command 7 HI (bit-coded)
! 8 - Linearization P4 (D) x
! 9 - Volumetric (D) x
! A - Optimize controller (D) x
B - Calibration Acquire (D) x x x x x
C - Calibration Abort (D) x x x x x
D - Time Acquire (D) x x x x x
! E - Bin: Tare (D)
! F - Bin: Weight Check (D)

16 8 180 384 Command 8 LO (bit-coded)

17 Command 8 HI (bit-coded)
! 8 - Print Batch Report (D) x x x x x

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 21


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Attention: Special condition or source


parameter for marked values "!". See manual.

(x) Not available with measusing systems


o Reserved for use with EasyServe

Byte- Word- ID ID Rem. Value Mode VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM
Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

9 Print Status Report (D) x x x x x


A Print Intermediate Totalizer (D) x x x x x
B Cancel Printout (D) x x x x x
C Print Parameters (D) x x x x x
D Print Parameter Shortlist (D)
E Reserved (Register EasyServe) (D) o o o o o
F Reserved (Deregister EasyServe) (D) o o o o o

18 9 Command 9 LO (bit-coded)
0 Start Keyb. Mode (D) x x x x x
1 Stop Keyb. Mode (D) x x x x x
2 Start Simulation (D) x x x x
3 Stop Simulation (D) x x x x
4 Load Default Parameter (D) x x x x x
5 Check Meas. Start (D) x
6 Manual Prefeeder (ES only) (D)
7 Automatic Prefeeder (ES only) (D)

19 Command 9 HI (bit-coded)
reserved

2.6.3 Preset Values in Floating Point Format

Attention: Special condition or source


parameter for marked values "!". See
manual.

Byte- Word- ID ID Bem. Value VLW VBW VDB VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

For Protocol 3964(R), data block AO


HEX starts here!
0 0 250 592 ! Absolute Setpoint [kg/h] x x x
4 2 252 594 ! Absolute Batch Setpoint [kg] x x x x X
8 4 254 596 Make-Up Setpoint [kg] x x X
12 6 256 598 Batch No. x x x
16 8 258 600 PLC-Analog-OUT 1
20 10 25A 602 PLC-Analog-OUT 2
24 12 25C 604 Span Correction Value

28 14 25E 606 Tare Correction Value

22 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

32 16 260 608 ! Difference Feed Rate [kg/h]


36 18 262 610 Hopper Level [kg]
40 20 264 612 ! Setpoint Feeder 2 [kg/h]
44 22 266 614 Setpoint Hopper Level [kg]
48 24 268 616
52 26 26A 618
56 28 26C 620
60 30 26E 622

2.6.4 Preset Values in Integer Format (Modbus)

Attention: Special condition or source


parameter for marked values "!". See
manual.
Byte- Word- ID ID Value VLW VBW VDB VMD VDM
Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

0 0 20 32 ! Serial Setpoint [kg/h] x x


0 to MAXINCR. = 0 to 300% P
2 1 21 33 ! Serial Batch Setpoint [kg/h] x x x x
0 to MAXINCR. = 0 to 100% P * 8 HRS.
4 2 22 34 Make-Up Setpoint [kg/h] x x x
0 to MAXINCR. = 0 to 100% P

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 23


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.6.5 Status Information

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

For Protocol 3964(R), data block 64 HEX


starts here!
0 0 02D0 720 Status 0 (coded as number)
Scale Type (Low Byte) x x x x x
1 Software Revision (High Byte) x x x x x

2 1 Status 1 (coded as number)


Software-Version (Low-Byte) x x x x x
3 Software-Version (High-Byte) x x x x x

4 2 02F0 752 Status 2 LO (bit-coded)


0 Scale On (measurement active; no motor x x x x x
control in local mode)
1 - No Release x x x x x
2 Counter Active x x x x x
3 Volumetric x x x
4 Select. Language OK x x x x x
5 Alarm x x x x x
6 Warning x x x x x
7 Calibration Active x x x x x

5 Status 2 HI (bit-coded)
8 Normal Mode x x x x x
9 Keyboard Mode x x x x x
A Local Mode
B Simulation Mode x x x x
C Volum. Start-Up x x x
D Meas. Drive ON x
E Wheel Meas. Drive Delay x
F Setpoint Limited x x

6 3 Status 3 LO (bit-coded)
0 Batch Selected x x x x x
1 Batch Active x x x x x
2 Batch Dribble Feed (pre-act cont.) x x x x x
3 Batch + Clearance x
4 NON-SI active x x x x x
5 Dead Time active
6 Dead Time Setpoint active
7 Dead Time ON/OFF active

7 Status 3 HI (bit-coded)
8 Tare x x x x x
9 Zero Set x x x x
A Weight Check x x x x
B Pulses/Revolution x x

24 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

C DAE Adjustment x
D Auto Zero active x x x
E Volumetric Adaption x
F Gravimetric Optimization x

8 4 0310 784 Status 4 LO (bit-coded)


0 Meas. System x x x
1 Gain-In-Weight x
2 Filling Active x
3 Discharge Active x x x
4 Gate Open x
5 Gate Closed x
! 6 2nd Batch Unit active (VLW20151 only)
7 Surge Hopper present

9 Status 4 HI (bit-coded)
8 Feed rate > MAX x x x x x
9 Feed rate < MIN x x x x x
A Belt load > MAX x x
B Belt load < MIN x x
C Speed > MAX x x
D Speed < MIN x x
E Bin > MAX
F Bin < MIN

10 5 Status 5 LO (bit-coded)
0 Bin Level Control existent
1 Hopper level > MAX x
2 Hopper level < MIN x
3 Measured load > MAX x
4 Measured load < MIN
5 n > MAX x
6 n < MIN x x
7 Check system waits for acknowledgement

11 Status 5 HI (bit-coded)
8 Check system available
9 Rel. tare exceeded
A Abs. tare exceeded
B Rel. range exceeded
C Abs. range exceeded
D Check meas. announced
E Prepare check
F Check active

12 6 0330 816 Status 6 LO (bit-coded)


0 NON-SI active x x x x x
1 Waiting for Confirm. x x x x x
2 Waiting for checkweight x x x x

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 25


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

3 Param. active to VLB x x x x x


4 Linearization P1 x
5 Linearization P2 x
6 Linearization P3 x
7 Linearization P4 x

13 Status 6 HI (bit-coded)
8 Open Gate x
9 Blow-out ON x
A Manual Prefeeder
B - Bin: Tare
C - Bin: Weight Check
D Optimization Bin Controller
E - 2nd Bridge > MAX
F - 2nd Bridge < MIN

14 7 Status 7 LO (bit-coded)
0 Emergency Setpoint active
1 Trend active
2-
3-
4-
5-
6-
7-

15 Status 7 HI (bit-coded)
8 Moisture Corr. Active
9 Moisture > MAX
A Moisture Meas. Faulty
B PreFeed Control Active
C EasyServe active x x x x x
D EasyServe announced x x x x x
! E Feeder 1 Active (VLW20152 only)
! F Feeder 2 Active (VLW20152 only

16 8 0350 848 Status 8


0 Calibr. Set Nominal Feed Rate
1 - Dig. Output Pre-cut-off Amount
2 MAX Limit Value
3 - MIN Limit Value
4 VSM 20110 (DISOCONT L)
5 Refilling Active x x x x
6 VSM 20107 (Pulverized Coal)
7 Fill Bin Weigher

17 Reserved
8-
9-
A-

26 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

B-
C-
D-
E-
F-

9 Status 9
18 Reserved
19 Reserved

The events defined in a type of scale react on


the event-bits. Bits not used are send with the
value Null.

20 10 0370 880 Event S1-S8


0 Event Warning 2 S1 x x x x x
1 Event Warning 2 S2 x x x x x
2 Event Warning 2 S3 x x x x x
3 Event Warning 2 S4 x x x x x
4 Event Warning 2 S5 x x x x x
5 Event Warning 2 S6 x x x x x
6 Event Warning 2 S7 x x x x x
7 Event Warning 2 S8 x x x x x

21 Event S9
8 Event Warning 2 S9 x x x x x
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-

22 11 --
23 --

24 12 0390 912 Event Warning 2 E1-E8 x x x x x


25 Event Warning 2 E9 x x x x x

26 13 --
27 --

28 14 03B0 944 Event Warning 2 B1-B8 x x x x x


29 Event Warning 2 B9 x x x x x

30 15 --
31 --

32 16 03D0 976 --
33 --

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 27


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

34 17 --
35 --

36 18 03F0 1008 Event Warning 2 C1-C8 x x x x x


37 Event Warning 2 C9 x x x x x

38 19 Event Warning 2 H1-H8 x x x x x


39 Event Warning 2 H9 x x x x x

40 20 0410 1040 Event Warning 2 L1-L8 x x x x x


41 Event Warning 2 L9 x x x x x

42 21 Event Warning 1 S1-S8 x x x x x


43 Event Warning 1 S9 x x x x x

44 22 0430 1072 --
45 --

46 23 Event Warning 1 E1-E8 x x x x x


47 Event Warning 1 E9 x x x x x

48 24 0450 1104 --
49 --

50 25 Event Warning 1 B1-B8 x x x x x


51 Event Warning 1 B9 x x x x x

52 26 0470 1136 --
53 --

54 27 --
55 --

56 28 0490 1168 --
57 --

58 29 Event Warning 1 C1-C8 x x x x x


59 Event Warning 1 C9 x x x x x

60 30 04B0 1200 Event Warning 1 H1-H8 x x x x x


61 Event Warning 1 H9 x x x x x

31 Event Warning 1 L1-L8 x x x x x


62 Event Warning 1 L9 x x x x x
63
64 32 04D0 1232 Event Alarm S1-S8 x x x x x
65 Event Alarm S9 x x x x x

66 33 --

28 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

67 --

68 34 04F0 1264 Event Alarm E1-E8 x x x x x


69 Event Alarm E9 x x x x x

70 35 --
71 --

72 36 0510 1296 Event Alarm B1-B8 x x x x x


73 Event Alarm B9 x x x x x

74 37 --
75 --

76 38 0530 1328 --
77 --

78 39 --
79 --

80 40 0550 1360 Event Alarm C1-C8 x x x x x


81 Event Alarm C9 x x x x x

82 41 Event Alarm H1-H8 x x x x x


83 Event Alarm H9 x x x x x

84 42 0570 1392 Event Alarm L1-L8 x x x x x


85 Event Alarm L9 x x x x x

86 43 Digital Inputs
0 DI1 x x x x x
1 DI2 x x x x x
2 DI3 x x x x x
3 DI4 x x x x x
4 DI5 x x x x x
5 DI6 x x x x x
6 DI7 x x x x x
7-

87 Digital Inputs: Error Bits


8 DI1 Error
9 DI2 Error
A DI3 Error
B DI4 Error
C DI5 Error
D DI6 Error x x x x x
E DI7 Error x x x x x
F-

88 44 0590 1424

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 29


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

89

90 45 Digital Outputs
0 - DO1 x x x x x
1 - DO2 x x x x x
2 - DO3 x x x x x
3 - DO4 x x x x x
4 - DO5 x x x x x
5 - DO6 x x x x x
6 - DO7 x x x x x
7 - DO8 x x x x x

91

92 46 05B0 1456
93
94 47
95

96 48 05D0 1488
97
98 49
99

100 50 05F0 1520


101
102 51
103

104 52 0610 1552 Highest-Priority Event (LO) x x x x x


Bit 0 3 Event number
Range 0 8
corresponds to displays 1 - 9

Bit 4 7 Event group


Range 1 12
S = 1, E = 3, B=5, C=9, H=10, L=11

105 Highest-Priority Event (HI) x x x x x


Bit 8 11 Event class
Range 1 4
A=1, W1=2, W2=3, (IG=4)

Bit 12 - 15 Acknowledge event


Range 0 1
Acknowledged = 1, Not acknowledged = 0

106 53 Parameter block of the event class


107 Parameter block number

30 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

108 54 0630 1584 Century x x x x x


109 Year x x x x x
110 55 Month x x x x x
111 Day x x x x x

112 56 0650 1616 Hour x x x x x


113 Minute x x x x x
114 57 Second x x x x x
115 Feed index

116 58 0670 1648 Next Event from error logger (LO) x x x x x


(Zero if list is empty)

Bit 0 - 3 Event number


Range 0 - 8
corresponds to displays 1 - 9

Bit 4 - 7 Event group


Range 1 - 12
S = 1, E = 3, B=5, C=9, H=10, L=11

117 Next Event from error logger (HI) x x x x x

Bit 8 - 11 Event class


Range 1 - 4
A=1, W1=2, W2=3, (IG=4)

Bit 12 Acknowledge event


Range 0 - 1
Acknowledged = 1, Not acknowledged = 0

Bit 13 New Event


Range 0 - 1
New = 1

Bit 14 Reset Event


Range 0 - 1 (Reset = 1)

Bit 15 Time: am /pm


Range 0 - 1 (am = 0, pm = 1)

118 59 Time stamp event logger x x x


119 Time stamp event logger x x x
Bit 0- 5: Seconds (0-59)
Bit 6-11: Minutes (0-59)
Bit 12-15: Hours (0-11)

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 31


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.6.6 Measurement Values in Floating Point Format

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

For Protocol 3964(R), data block 6E HEX


starts here!
0 0 0750 1872 Feed Rate [kg/h] x x x x x
4 2 0752 1874 Totalizer 1 [kg] x x x x x
8 4 0754 1876 Totalizer 2 [kg] x x x x x
12 6 0756 1878 Totalizer 3 [kg] x x x x x
16 8 0758 1880 Belt Load [kg/m] x x
20 10 075A 1882 Measured load [kg] x x
24 12 075C 1884 Belt Speed [m/s] x x
28 14 075E 1886 Speed [1/min] x x
32 16 0760 1888 Fill Weight [kg] x
36 18 0762 1890 Surge Hopper [kg]
40 20 0764 1892 2nd Platform [kg/m]
44 22 0766 1894 Actual Setpoint [kg/h] x x x
48 24 0768 1896 Batch Feed Rate [kg] x x x x x
52 26 076A 1898 Batch Res. Amount [kg] x x x x x
56 28 076C 1900 Relative Setpoint [%] x x x
60 30 076E 1902 Prefeeder Position [%]
64 32 0770 1904 Deviation [%] x x x
68 34 0772 1906 Moisture [%]
72 36 0774 1908 Feed Rate Moisture Corr. [kg/h]
76 38 0776 1910 Totalizer 1 Corr. [kg]
80 40 0778 1912 Totalizer 2 Corr. [kg]
84 42 077A 1914 Totalizer 3 Corr. [kg]
88 44 077C 1916 Rel. Bin Weight
92 46 077E 1918 Setpoint Bin Level
96 48 0780 1920 VSE1: Analog Output [mA] x x x x x
100 50 0782 1922 VEA1: Analog Input [mA] x x x x x
104 52 0784 1924 VEA1: Analog Output [mA] x x x x x
108 54 0786 1926 VSE2: Analog Output [mA]
112 56 0788 1928 VEA2: Analog Input [mA]
116 58 078A 1930 VEA2: Analog Output [mA]
120 60 078C 1932 VSE3: Analog Output [mA]
124 62 078E 1934 VEA3: Analog Input [mA]
128 64 0790 1936 VEA3: Analog Output [mA]
132 66 0792 1938 Belt Slip [%] x x
136 68 0794 1940 Belt Drift [cm] x x
140 70 0796 1942 Relative Feed Rate [%] x x x x x
144 72 0798 1944 Relative Belt Load [%] x x
148 74 079A 1946 External Setpoint [kg/h] x x x
152 76 079C 1948 Batch Setpoint [kg] x x x x x
156 78 079E 1950 Tacho [Hz] x x x x
160 80 07A0 1952 Utilize L/C [%] x x x x x
164 82 07A2 1954 Load Cell Raw VAP [mV/V] x x
168 84 07A4 1956 Load Cell Raw BIC [mV/V] x x
172 86 07A6 1958 Load Cell Raw [mV/V] x x x x x

32 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

176 88 07A8 1960 Controller Magnitude [mA] x x x


180 90 07AA 1962 Rel. Fill Weight [%] x
184 92 07AC 1964 Calibration Result 1 -Current Upper Value x x x x x
188 94 07AE 1966 Calibration Result 2 - Current Lower Value x x x x x
192 96 07B0 1968 Y_unlin x
196 98 07B2 1970 Y_lin x
200 100 07B4 1972 DAE Utilization [%] x
204 102 07B6 1974 Differential of F [kg/h] x
208 104 07B8 1976 Adaption Factor Index 1 x
212 106 07BA 1978 Adaption Factor Index 2
216 108 07BC 1980 Adaption Factor Index 3
220 110 07BE 1982 Adaption Factor Index 4
224 112 07C0 1984 CM Meas. Time [s] x
228 114 07C2 1986 Number of all CM x
232 116 07C4 1988 Curr. No. x
236 118 07C6 1990 CM: Mean Delta-F [kg] x
240 120 07C8 1992 CM Mean Feed Rate [kg/h] x
244 122 07CA 1994 Feed Constancy [%] x
248 124 07CC 1996 Nominal Belt Load [kg/m] x x
252 126 07CE 1998 Feed Constancy [g] x
256 128 07D0 2000 Control Magnitude Yz [mA]
260 130 07D2 2002 Control Magnitude Yzi [%]
264 132 07D4 2004 Nominal Measured Load [kg] x x
268 134 07D6 2006 Actual Value, not linearized [kg/h] x x
272 136 07D8 2008 Actual Tare [kg] x x x x
276 138 07DA 2010 Bin: Utilize L/C [%]
280 140 07DC 2012 Bin: Load Cell Raw [mV/V]
284 142 07DE 2014 Control Magnitude Yb [mA]
288 144 07E0 2016 Control Magnitude Ybi [mA]
292 146 07E2 2018 Analog Input DI4 [mA]
296 148 07E4 2020 Check: Relative Tare [%]
300 150 07E6 2022 Check: Relative Span [%]
304 152 07E8 2024 Check: Continuous Totalizer Z [kg]
308 154 07EA 2026 Check: Result F/Z
312 156 07EC 2028 Check: Measurement Time [h]
316 158 07EE 2030 Check: Belt Length [m]
320 160 07F0 2032 2nd Bridge: Relative Belt Load [%]
324 162 07F2 2034 2nd Bridge: Load Cell Raw [mV/V]
328 164 07F4 2036 2nd Bridge: Utilize L/C [%]
332 166 07F6 2038 Control Magnitude Y2 [%]
336 168 07F8 2040 Difference Feed Rate [kg/h]
340 170 07FA 2042 Rel. Actual Setpoint [%] x x x
344 172 07FC 2044 Rel. Measured Load [%] x x
348 174 07FE 2046 Bin Feed Rate [kg/h]
352 176 0800 2048 Check Meas. Monitoring [%]
356 178 0802 2050 Component Control Magnitude [mA]
360 180 0804 2052 Current Batch-No. x x x
364 182 0806 2054 Totalizer Component 1 [kg]
368 184 0808 2056 Totalizer Component 2 [kg]
372 186 080A 2058 Totalizer Component 3 [kg]

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 33


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

376 188 080C 2060 Totalizer Component 4 [kg]


380 190 080E 2062 Totalizer Component 5 [kg]
384 192 0810 2064 Totalizer Component 6 [kg]
388 194 0812 2066 Totalizer Component 7 [kg]
392 196 0814 2068 Totalizer Component 8 [kg]
396 198 0816 2070 Totalizer Component 9 [kg]
400 200 0818 2072 Totalizer Component 10 [kg]
404 202 081A 2074 Totalizer Sum of all Batches [kg]
408 204 081C 2076 Tacho Input VSE 2 [Hz]
412 206 081E 2078 Corr. Feed Rate rel. [%]
416 208 0820 2080 Belt Load [kg/m] non-linearized x
420 210 0822 2082 2-Sensor Slip [%]
424 212 0824 2084 Setpoint last / act. Batch [kg]
428 214 0826 2086 Current No. of last / act. Batch
432 216 0828 2088 Component No. of last / act. Batch
436 218 082A 2090 EIO: Analog Output 1 [mA]
440 220 082C 2092 EIO: Analog Output 2 [mA]
444 222 082E 2094 EIO: Analog Output 3 [mA]
448 224 0830 2096 EIO: Analog Output 4 [mA]
452 226 0832 2098 EIO: Analog Input 1 [mA]
456 228 0834 2100 EIO: Analog Input 2 [mA]
460 230 0836 2102 EIO: Analog Input 3 [mA]
464 232 0838 2104 EIO: Analog Input 4 [mA]
468 234 083A 2106 Setpoint Feeder 1 [kg/h]
472 236 083C 2108 Setpoint Feeder 2 [kg/h]
476 238 083E 2110 Nominal Feed Rate Total [kg/h]
480 240 0840 2112 Contr. Magnit. 2nd Feeder [mA]
484 242 0842 2114 Speed 2nd Feeder [1/min]
488 244 0844 2116 Feed Rate 2nd Feeder [kg/h]
492 246 0846 2118 Fill-Weight 2nd Feeder [kg]
496 248 0848 2120 Counter 2nd Feeder
500 250 084A 2122 Check Weigher Print Value 1 x
504 252 084C 2124 Check Weigher Print Value 2 x
508 254 084E 2126 Check Weigher Print Value 3 x
512 256 0850 2128 Check Weigher Actual Value [%] x
516 258 0852 2130 Check Weigher Variance
520 260 0854 2132 L/C Resistance [ohms] x x x x x
524 262 0856 2134 Make-up Setpoint [kg] x x x
528 264 0858 2136 Make-up Residual Amount [kg] x x x
532 266 085A 2138 Mean Value I [%] x
536 268 085C 2140 Variance I [%] x
540 270 085E 2142 Belt Load QMAX [%] x
544 272 0860 2144 Time QMIN [%] x
548 274 0862 2146 Taring Result 1 [%] x
552 276 0864 2148 Taring Result 2 [%] x
556 278 0866 2150 Taring Result 3 [%] x
560 280 0868 2152 Taring Result 4 [%] x
564 282 086A 2154 Taring Result 5 [%] x
568 284 086C 2156 Check Weigher Print Value 4 x
572 286 086E 2158 Pulse Sensor x x

34 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.6.7 Measurement Values in Integer Format (Modbus)

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

0 0 30 48 Actual value [kg/h] x x x x x


0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 300% P
2 1 31 49 Totalizer 1 [kg] x x x x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to P * 8 Hours
4 2 32 50 Totalizer 2 [kg] x x x x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to P * 24 Hours
6 3 33 51 Totalizer 3 [kg] x x x x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to P * 720 Hours
8 4 34 52 Belt Load [kg/m] x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 200% Q
10 5 35 53 Measured Load [kg] x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 200% Q
12 6 36 54 Speed [m/s] x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100%V [cm/s]
14 7 37 55 RPM [1/min] x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100% N
16 8 38 56 Hopper [kg] x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100% F
18 9 39 57 Surge Hopper [kg]
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100% B
20 10 3A 58 Surge Hopper [kg]
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 200 % Q
22 11 3B 59 Effective Setpoint [kg/h] x x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 300% P
24 12 3C 60 Batch Actual Value [kg] x x x x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to P * 8 Hours
26 13 3D 61 Batch Residual Amount [kg] x x x x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to P * 8 Hours
28 14 3E 62 Procental Setpoint Evaluation [%] x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100 %
30 15 3F 63 Prefeeder Position [%]
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100 %
32 16 40 64 Deviation [%] x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100 %

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 35


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.6.8 Values in Long Integer Format

Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM


Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)

For Protocol 3964(R), data block C8 HEX


starts here!
0 0 0980 2432 Pulses still output
4 2 0982 2434 Pulses output x x x x x
8 4 0984 2436 Time Voltage ON [h] x x x x x
12 6 0986 2438 Time Scale ON [h] x x x x x
16 8 0988 2440 Reserved x
20 10 098A 2442 Selected Options x x x x x
24 12 098C 2444 Status Bit Field 1 for Commands 4 and 5 x x x x x
28 14 098E 2446 Status Bit Field 2 for Commands 6 and 7 x x x x x
32 16 0990 2448 Status Bit Field 3 for Commands 8 and 9 x x x x x
36 18 0992 2450 Status Bit Field 4 for Commands 10 and 11 x x x x x
40 20 0994 2452 Calibration Result 1 Text ID x x x x x
44 22 0996 2454 Calibration Result 1 Unit ID x x x x x
48 24 0998 2456 Calibration Result 2 Text ID x x x x x
52 26 099A 2458 Calibration Result 2 Unit ID x x x x x
56 28 099C 2460 Calibration Result 1 After -comma-places x x x x x
ID
60 30 099E 2462 Calibration Result 2 After-comma-places ID x x x x x
64 32 09A0 2464 Calibration Error Text ID x x x x x
68 34 09A2 2466 Para-Checksum x x x x x
72 36 09A4 2468 Software Date x x x x x
76 38 09A6 2470 Flash-Checksum x x x x x
80 40 09A8 2472 Flash-Checksum calculated x x x x x
84 42 09AA 2474 Hardware-Version x x x x x
88 44 09AC 2476 Option Card Version x x x x x
92 46 09AE 2478 Pulses Output x x x x x

36 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

2.6.9 Events
The input in table references the parameter used to change the event class.
System Message (S-1) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM
S1 Memory Error O 02 Q 02 N 02 M 02 M 02
S2 No Release O 07 Q 07 N 07 M 06 M 04
S3 Maintenance STR-Meter K 04 K 04 K 04 K 04 K 04
S4 Maintenance Interval Electric K 02 K 02 K 02 K 02 K 02
S5 RESERVE
S6 RESERVE
S7 Simulation active Q 10 N 10 M 08 M 07
S8 Setpoint limited Q 11 N 11 M 09
S9 Communication Error Host L 03 L 03 L 03 L 03 L 03

Electrical System (E-3) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM


E1 Power Failure O 01 Q 01 N 01 M 01 M 01
E2 Namur Error Tacho O 04 Q 04 N 04 M 04
E3 Namur Error Belt O 05 Q 05 N 05
E4 RESERVE
E5 Stand-By F 14 F 14 F 10
E6 External Input F 15 M 10 M 08
E7 RESERVE
E8 RESERVE
E9 RESERVE

Material Flow (B-5) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM


B1 Out of Tolerance I 06 I 05 I 05 I 05 I 05
B2 Control Deviation R 24 O 08 N 06
B3 Controller Ltd. R 25 O 09 N 07
B4 Max BATCH Act. Value I 08
B5 DAE active O 08
B6 DAE Time O 09
B7 T_Gate H 16
B8 T_Volumetric H 17
B9 Linearization S 10 P 10 O 10 N 10

Calibration (C-9) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM


C1 L/C Input O 06 Q 06 N 06 M 05 M 03
C2 Tacho Input O 03 Q 03 N 03 M 03
C3 Belt Skew N 12 M 12
C4 Belt Drift N 10 M 10
C5 Tare Correction > MAX H 05 H 04 H 04
C6 RESERVE
C7 Set Time To Zero H 07
C8 Slip Error N 14 M 14
C9 Tare Diff. > MAX H 12

Maximum (H-10) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM


H1 I > MAX F 04 F 04 F 04 F 04 F 04
H2 Load > MAX F 08 F 08
H3 v > MAX F 12 F 12
H4 L/C Input > MAX O 08 Q 08 N 08 M 07 M 05
H5 F > MAX F 08
H6 Wheel Overload F 06
H7 n > MAX F 12
H8 F > Fo H 09
H9 RESERVE

Minimum (L-11) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM


L1 I < MIN F 02 F 02 F 02 F 02 F 02
L2 Load < MIN F 06 F 06
L3 v < MIN F 10 F 10
L4 L/C Input < MIN O 09 Q 09 N 09 M 06
L5 F < MIN F 06
L6 RESERVE
L7 n < MIN F 10 F 08
L8 F < Buffer MIN H 07
L9 RESERVE

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 37


Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP

3 PROFIBUS DP
This chapter describes the interfacing of the INTECONT Profibus slave to a Profibus
Master assembly.
Described is the functionality of the Profibus module, the data exchange between
Profibus Master and INTECONT, fault diagnosis and troubleshooting. The Profibus
hardware is described at the Profibus Module VPB020V/VPB8020 item.
Designed to assist the S7 programmer in commissioning, Manual BVH2204 describes
the use of the general user data construction at the DISOCONT example. However,
data construction is identical for INTECONT.

3.1 Commissioning Guideline

1. Prepare the hardware as per the chapter on Profibus Module VPB020V /


VPB8020
VPB020 can always be used in the VEG units.

Starting with the program versions.


VBW20600-08
VDB20600-08
VDM20600-05
VLW20600-07
VMD20600-08

standard procedure will be changing over to the VCB8020 model. The


communication subassemblies used are selected with the Hardware parameter in
the fieldbus block.
2. Determine data to be transferred. Check to see if the data of FIXED mode 1/2
suffice to meet your requirements. If YES, select desired process image at
Fieldbus Communication Configuration. If NO, configure your process image
by input of requisite IDs (see Fieldbus Data item).
3. Generating the master parameter sets using the GSD file. Please select the
correct GSD file depending on the hardware used.
4. Start communication through Master.

3.2 Profibus Module Functionality

! Module certified to EN 50170


! Cyclic user data exchange with Master (DP-V0)
! Automatic baud rate recognition
! Bus interface monitoring
! Easy parameterisation of VPB 020V / VPB8020 using base unit control station or
EasyServe diagnostic tool
! Support of PROFIBUS control command SYNC for synchronised data transfer
from Master to various slaves
! Support of PROFIBUS control command FREEZE for synchronised data transfer
from various slaves to Master
! No user-specific diagnostic functions
! Fail Safe: clear state supported
! No change of station address via bus

38 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP

3.3 User Data Construction

For details and examples on user data construction, see Fieldbus Data item.

3.4 Settings on DP-Slave (INTECONT)

For parameterisation, you can use the Operator Panel or the EasyServe tool.

The parameter description holds for either unit.

Parameter Value range Default Explanation

Protocol type all fieldbus protocols NO Select protocol: here


Profibus-DP
Timeout Host 0 ... 300 s 10 s Designed for interface
monitoring.
ZERO value means that
interface is not activated.
Communication W2 (Warning 2), IG Class of communication
Host W1 (Warning 1), error
A(LARM),
IG(nore)
Address 0 ... 126 126 Slave address on Profibus

Configuration FIXED, FIXED Lets you set construction


NO_PARA_ID, and meaning of user data.
PARA_ID
Float format Siemens-KG, IEEE IEEE Format for all setpoints,
measurement values and
floating point parameters.
Hardware VxB020 VxB020 Selecting the communication
VxB8020 subassembly

Note
Any change to a grey-marked parameter resets the field connection, i.e. the slave is
excluded from user data exchange for approx. 4 sec.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 39


Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP

3.5 Settings on Profibus DP Master


Unit-master-data files (GSD)

INTECONT PLUS is a modular slave whose properties are described by 3 modules.

Note:
! You will find the INTECONT PLUS configuration in the S7 hardware configurator
at Profibus-DP/Further Fieldbuses/Controller/INTECONT.
! The current GSD files

ICV10524.GSD (VEG + VPB020)


ICV20524.GSD (VEG + VPB8020)

can be loaded from the service page of Schenck-Process GmbH


(http://support.schenckprocess.com/ , path: Bus Systeme-Profibus).

! Reading/writing of double words in S7 systems: please note that the INTECONT


PLUS double words can neither be read nor written using function modules
SFC14 and SFC15 of S7 systems. Access the peripherals direct.

40 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP

3.6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

If you have selected one of the fieldbuses, any malfunction is reported by event
message "Communication Error Host (S9) provided that this message is assigned to
an event class other than IG(NORE). The message is output both on display and on
EasyServe. If only the display is available, read the next two items. The EasyServe, if
present, provides further information on fault diagnosis.

Event Message Communication Error Host

The event message is designed to report any error concerning the fieldbus module:
! Different station address on Master and scale
! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty. Watch LEDs
on module. In case of doubt, restart system, and module is initialised provided that
parameters are properly set (red LED flashes).
! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected. For proper connection, see
Fieldbus Hardware item.
! Fieldbus hardware bus termination is not (or various times) available.
! Check resistors on module (supplied state: "Not activated") and on bus
connectors. For details, see Fieldbus Hardware item.
! Selected protocol type does not correspond to the extension board. Change
parameterisation or replace module.
! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterisation.
! Scale configuration differs from Master configuration. Change GSD module or
scale parameterisation.
! Inadmissible ID detected in Master --> scale message (only use bold-printed IDs).
! All preset IDs in message from host system have zero value (communication
between Master-CPU and communication processor (CP) failed). Minimum one
preset ID must be unequal to zero, or in FIXED mode the release bit must be
set.
! The communication module does not fit the settings of the Hardware fieldbus
parameter.

EasyServe Fieldbus view

The chapter on Fieldbus Data shows and explains how cyclical user data is displayed
for all protocols

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 41


Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP

3.7 Profibus Module (VPB020V)


Meaning of the LEDs on the Profibus connection
On the Profibus connection (VPB020V), the LED is lit

H1 (red) Blinking mode: when the Fieldbus connection has been reinitialised.
This happens after applying voltage and after
changing certain fieldbus parameters (in grey, see
below)
OFF: when initialising is complete and the user data
exchange is OK
H2 ON: when user data is being transmitted
(green) OFF: Connection not yet initialised or fieldbus
malfunctioning

If no LED is lit, please check the parameterisation and the cable connection to the
main board.

To provide an interface to the Profibus, the module can be attached to the INTECONT
PLUS cover. The module is certified to EN 50170, the protocol used is DP-V0.

Bus termination:

Activate the bus terminals resistors on first and the last stations on bus. To do so, set
plug-in jumpers (W150, W151;W152) on board to position 1-2. On standard, the
resistors are not activated (position 2-3).

Bus address:
! Set address via parameter.
LED
! Status LED for communication OK (green)
! Bus error or configuration display (red)

The W100 jumper, for determining the power supply, must be plugged in position 2-3.

42 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP

3.8 Profibus module (VPB8020)


An option is to mount the module in the cover (VEG) or on the base card (VKG) of
INTECONT to create an interface to the Profibus. The module is certified in conformity
with EN 50170, the protocol is DP-V0.

The W100 jumper, for determining the power supply, must be plugged in position 2-3.

Bus termination
The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station of the
bus. This is done by setting alljumper plugs into position 1-2 on the card. As a rule the
resistances are not activated (position 2-3).

Bus addresses:
! The addresses are set using parameters.

Meaning of the LEDs on the Profibus connection

If no LED is lit, please check the parameterization and the cable connection to the
main board.

Opertion Mode (LED)

State Indication
Off Not online/No power
Green On-line, Date exchange
Green blinking on-line, clear mode
Red blinking (1 Hz) parameter error
Red blinking (2 Hz) configuration error

State LED
INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 43
Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP

Status Indication
Off Not power or not initialised
Green Initialised
Green blinking initialised, diagnostic event is pending
Red Exceeption error

Connector assignment (applies to all Profibus cards)

Pin Signal Signal


(X20, 9-pin Sub-D-female) (XP3, 5-pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5
max. 1.5mm)
Not used in INTECONT PLUS
1 - B-Line, positive RS485 RxD/TxD *
2 - A-Line, negative RS485 RxD/TxD
**
3 B-Line, Positive RS485 RxD/TxD * GND BUS
4 RTS, Request To Send +5V BUS
5 GND BUS Screening
6 +5V BUS -
7 - -
8 A-Line, Negative RS485 RxD/TxD ** -
9 - -
Housing Bus Cable Shield -

* This cable has the conductor color red.


** This cable has the conductor color green.

Characteristics (applies to all Profibus cards)

Isolation optocouplers
Voltage supply 5V DC internal
Current supply max. 310mA
Connectors 5-pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5 max. 1.5mm
9-pin Sub-D-female

3.9 For Further Reading


Profibus standard EN 50170
Profibus user organisation www.profibus.com
PROFIBUS-DP/DPV1, Grundlagen, Manfred Popp, Hthig Verlag , 2000
Tipps und Tricks fr Anwender
HMS documentation on Anybus-IC www.hms-networks.com
BVH2204 Commissioning aid for S7 programmers
BVH2098AA EASYSERVE

44 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
DeviceNet

4 DeviceNet
The present chapter describes the interfacing of the INTECONT DeviceNet slave to a
DeviceNet Master assembly.
Described is the functionality of the DeviceNet module, the data exchange between
DeviceNet Master and INTECONT, diagnosis and troubleshooting.
For DeviceNet hardware, see DeviceNet Module VCB020V / VCB8020V item.

4.1 Commissioning Guideline


The VCB020 can always be used in the VEG units.
Starting with the program versions
! VBW20600-08
! VDB20600-08
! VDM20600-05
! VLW20600-07
! VMD20600-08
standard procedure will be changing over to the VCB8020 model. The communication
subassemblies used are selected with the Hardware parameter in the fieldbus block.

! Determining the data to be transmitted - the ID of the data is required (see


'Fieldbus Data' chapter).
! Creating master parameter sets using the EDS file. Please select the correct EDS
file depending upon the hardware used.
! Set the Slave Address INTECONT parameter
! Start communication by the master

4.2 DeviceNet Module Functionality

! Module certified to DeviceNet specification 2.0


! Cyclic exchange of user data with Master. As a rule, the POLL mode is used for
transfer of I/O data.
! Bus interface monitoring
! Easy parameterisation of VCB020V / VCB8020V via base unit control station or
EasyServe diagnostic tool.

4.3 User Data Construction


For details and samples on general user data construction, see Fieldbus Data item.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 45


Schenck Process
DeviceNet

4.4 Settings on DeviceNet Slave (INTECONT)


For parameterisation, use Operator Panel or EasyServe tool.

The parameter description holds for both units.

Parameter Value range Default Explanation

Protocol type all fieldbus NO Select protocol: here


protocols DeviceNet
Timeout Host 0 ... 300 s 10 s Designed for interface
monitoring.
ZERO value means that
interfance is not activated.
Communication W2 (Warning 2), IG Class of communication error
Host W1 (Warning 1),
A(LARM),
IG(nore)
Address 1 ... 63 63 Slave address on DeviceNet

Baud rate 125k, 250k, 500k 125k DeviceNet baud rate

Configuration FIXED, FIXED Lets you set construction and


NO_PARA_ID, meaning of user data
PARA_ID
DVN byte High-Low Low-High Byte sequence within a data
sequence Low-High word
DVN word I:std / L:std I:std / Word sequence within a data
sequence I:swp / L:std L:std double word, separately
I:std / L:swp settable for floating point
I:swp / L:swp values I(EEE) and integer
values L(ONG)
Hardware VxB020 VxB020 Selecting the communication
VxB8020 subassembly

Note
! Any change to a grey-marked parameter resets the field connection, i.e. the slave
is excluded from user data exchange for approx. 4 sec.

4.5 Settings on DeviceNet Master


Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)

The description file files can be found at the Schenck Process GmbH service side
(http://support.schenckprocess.com, path: Service-Download-Bus systems-
DeviceNet). The download file includes a Readme with detailed information.

46 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
DeviceNet

4.6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting


If you have selected one of the fieldbuses, any malfunction is reported by event
message "Communication Error Host (S9) provided that this message is assigned to
an event class other than IG(NORE). The message is output both on display and on
EasyServe. If only the display is available, read the next two items. The EasyServe, if
present, provides further information on fault diagnosis.

Event MessageCommunication Error Host

The event message is designed to report any error concerning the fieldbus module:
! Different station address on Master and scale
! Different baud rate on Master and scale
! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty.
! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected. For proper connection, see
Fieldbus Hardware.
! Fieldbus hardware bus termination is not (or various times) available. Check
resistors on module (supplied state: "Not activated") and on bus connectors. For
details, see Fieldbus Hardware.
! Selected protocol type does not correspond to the extension board. Change
parameterisation or replace module.
! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterisation.
! Inadmissible ID detected in Master --> scale message (only use bold-printed IDs).
! All preset IDs in message from host system have zero value (communication
between Master-CPU and communication processor (CP) failed). Minimum one
preset ID must be unequal to zero, or in FIXED mode the release bit must be
set.
! The communication module does not fit the settings of the Hardware fieldbus
parameter.

EasyServe Fieldbus View

The representation of cyclic user data is the same for all protocols. For details, see
Fieldbus Data item.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 47


Schenck Process
DeviceNet

4.7 DeviceNet Module (VCB020V)


To provide an interface to CAN bus using the DeviceNet protocol, you can attach the
module to the INTECONT cover.

Bus termination

! Activate the bus terminals resistors on first and the last stations on bus. To do so,
set the plug-in jumper W160 on board to position 1-2. On standard, the resistors
are not activated (position 2-3).

Baud rate and bus address are set via parameter.

X20 "

Set jumper W100 (Power supply source) to position 2-3.

48 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
DeviceNet

4.8 DeviceNet Modul (VCB8020V)

An option is to mount the module in the cover (VEG) or on the base board (VKG) of
INTECONT to create an interface to the CAN bus with the DeviceNet procedure.

The W100 jumper, for determining the power supply, must be plugged in position 2-3.

Bus termination
! The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station
of the bus. This is done by applying the W160 jumper to the position 1-2. By
default, the resistances are not activated (position 2-3).

Baud rate and bus addresses:

! Both values are set using parameters.

Meaning of the LEDs on the Profibus connection

Network Status (LED)

Status Indication
OFF Not online/ No power
Greev On-line, one or more connections are established
Green blinking on-line, no connection
Red Critical link failure
Red blinking (1 Hz) One or several connections are in time-out
Alternating Red/Green Self test

Moduel Status LED

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 49


Schenck Process
DeviceNet

Status Indication
Off No power
Green Operating in normal condition
Green blinking Faulty Configuration
Red Unreccoverable Faultst(s)
Red blinking Rectifiable Defect
Alternating Red/Greed Self test

Connector assignment (applies to all Devicenet cards)

Pin Signal X20


1 V-
2 CAN_L
3 screening
4 CAN_H
5 V+

Characteristics (applies to all Devicenet cards)

Isolation optocouplers
Voltage supply 5V DC internal
Current supply max. 250mA
Connectors Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 2.5mm
Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 1.5mm

4.9 For Further Reading


DeviceNet specification Version 2.0 (ODVA)
Bosch CAN specification Version 2.0, Sept. 1991
DeviceNet user organisation www.odva.com
HMS documentation on Anybus-IC www.hms-networks.com
BVH2098AA EASYSERVE

50 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Modbus

5 Modbus
The present chapter describes the interfacing of the INTECONT Modbus slave with a
Modbus Master assembly and describes the Modbus in the form activated by the
MODBUS selection. The previous version of the INTECONT-compatible Modbus
(MODCOMP) is described in Manual FH525 (only VEG).

Described is the functionality of the Modbus module, the data exchange between
Modbus Master and INTECONT, diagnosis and troubleshooting. The hardware of the
Modbus module is described at the end of this chapter.

5.1 Commissioning Guideline


Prepare the hardware as described in the Fieldbus Hardware item.
! Determine data to be transferred using the data IDs (see Fieldbus Data).
! Set INTECONT PLUS parameters Slave Address and Data Format.
! Start communication through Master.

5.2 Modbus Module Functionality


In general:

! Cyclical user data exchange with the master


! Monitoring the bus interface
! Easy to parameterise using the basic model's operating station or the EasyServe
diagnostic tool
! Modbus mode: RTU

VEG:
! Connection with RS422 (4-wire bus) or RS485 (2-wire bus, also called J-bus). The
physical characteristics can be selected by parameters. It can als be connected
via RS232.

VKG :
! Connection with RS422 (4-wire bus) or RS485 (2-wire bus, also called J-bus). The
physics are selected with wire jumper. It is connected directly to the base board.

5.3 Data Format


Transmission starts with MSB. Setpoints and measurement values can be transmitted
both in the IEEE float format (IEEE754, 32 bits) and in the integer format. The integer
format readies a 16-bit word whose resolution can be set in the range of 0 ....
MAXINCREMENTS. The maximum resolution is 215 increments. Integer and IEEE
format are addressed using different data addresses.
For every parameter, the IEEE format can be swapped wordwise. All control
information and statusses are represented in the form of a binary signal using the 8
data bits of each character. In addition, all control and status information can be
treated as single bit information.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 51


Schenck Process
Modbus

5.4 Function Codes (FC)


The table below lists the codes used and explains their meanings.

FC [dec] Meaning
1 Bitwise re-reading of control information (one/multiple bits)
2 Bitwise reading of status information (one/multiple bits)
3 Wordwise (re)reading of setpoints, measurement values, LONG values
and parameters (one/multiple words)
4 Wordwise reading of status information (one/multiple words)
5 Bitwise (re)setting of control information (always 1 bit)
6 Wordwise writing of control bits or setpoints (always 1 data word)
8 Diagnosis (only sub-codes 0 and 1)
15 Bitwise writing of control information (one/multiple bits)
16 Wordwise writing of commands (one/multiple data words)
23 Reading and writing of multiple data words in one cycle. This function
code may be used in all cases where FC3 or FC16 can be used.

5.5 Transmission Protection


The characters are protected by a parity bit (see MODBUS specification).
The messages are protected by check sum (CRC16) (see MODBUS specification).
The MODBUS specification determines the reaction on transmission errors (see 2-1
EXCEPTION RESPONSE).

5.6 Error Codes


Used are only error codes 01 to 03. Upon CRC error no response is sent.
All errors described below are comprised in device in the form of general error
message Communication Host. The message includes the timeout.

Error code Meaning


1 Station does not support requested function (FC).
2 Faulty data address
! ID or SC out of range
! Data offset + length excessive
3 Wrong data type
! Wrong data with FC 5 (admissible: 0xff00 and 0x0000)
! Data length < 0
! Requested length excessive
! Data address with IEEE or INT32 values odd

5.7 Station Addresses


Each scale receives a slave address starting from 1 in rising sequence. In the
following text, the highest settable address is called MAXSLAVE. The address is set
on scale or EasyServe in the dialog mode. MAXSLAVE has value 254. Address 0 is
the boradcast address. In this case, the slaves do not return any response.

52 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Modbus

5.8 User Data

5.8.1 Process Values


Every cyclic data segment includes values of the same type. The addresses of the
data within a segment are added in continuous succession. The data of a segment
can be read or written using a message.

5.8.2 Parameters
All parameters can be read and written. In contrast to cyclic values, only one
parameter per message can be processed. Transmission requires the parameter ID
unique throughout the system. For some important parameters of wagon type VLW,
these IDs can be found in the list of fieldbus data. For the residual parameters,
EasyServe can create a list including the IDs.
Note: Menu item EXTRAS-OPTIONS-PARAMETER-Print SysID lets you activate
printout of the IDs to be used for data address of the Modbus protocol. Please note
that the modification of the selection parameters requires special knowledge. Floating
point and/or integer values can be read and written without any problems. The data
formats correspond to those of the cyclic values.

5.9 Cyclic Data Exchange Via Modbus


In many cases, the host system must add a so-called segment address (depending on
function code) to the described data address. Furthermore, the data address must be
incremented by 1 since the Modbus protocols register addresses start from 1.
So the data address is configured like this:
Data Address = Segment Address + INTECONT PLUS Address + 1.

5.10 Sample Messages


The following lines show the construction of the Modbus messages. The first column
represents the message from bus Master to scale; the second, the scale response.
Floating point values are represented in the form of an (unswapped) IEEE number.

Data to scale Scale response Meaning


01 05 0140 ff00 8C12 01 05 0140 ff00 8C12 Start scale (single-bit command)
01 05 0141 ff00 DDD2 01 05 0141 ff00 DDD2 Stop scale (single-bit command)

01 06 0140 0040 8812 01 06 0140 0040 8812 Reset counter 1 (preset word)
01 03 02F0 0004 4582 01 03 08 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx Read 4 words of status information
cc cc xx = data, cc = CRC16
01 03 1082 0002 60E3 01 03 04 42C8 0000 6FB5 Read parameter (nominal feed rate,
ID=1082 (hex), value = 100))
01 10 1082 0002 04 4323 5678 01 10 1082 0002 E520 Write parameter (value =163.34)
6C1A

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 53


Schenck Process
Modbus

5.11 Settings on Modbus Slave (INTECONT)


For parameterisation, you can use the Operator Panel or the EasyServe tool.
The parameter description holds for either unit.

Parameter Value range Default Explanation

Protocol type all fieldbus protocols NO Select protocol: here


Modbus
Timeout Host 0 ... 300 s 10 s Designed for interface
monitoring.
ZERO value means that
interface is not activated.
Communication W2 (Warning 2), IG Class of communication
Host W1 (Warning 1), error
A(LARM),
IG(nore)
Modbus address 1 ... 254 1 Slave address on Modbus
Modbus 1 ... 32767 4096 Indicates maximum number
resolution of increments of value in
analog, or integer, format.
Modbus IEEE I:std / L:std I:std / Determines the word
format I:swp / L:std L:std sequence for transmission
I:std / L:swp of measurement values in
I:swp / L:swp the I(EEE)/L(ONG) format.
Modbus baud 9.6 19.2 38.4 kBaud 9.6 kBaud Baud rate
rate
Modbus data 8-O-1 8-O-1 Modbus normally uses an
format 8-E-1 11-bit character frame, e.g.
8-N-2 8-O-1
8-N-1 (10-bit frame) 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd
parity, 1 stop bit
Physics VEG: Physics Selecting the interface
RS232 RS485-2- physics
RS422 wire
RS485
VKG:
RS485-2-wire RS485-4-
RS485-4-wire wire

Note
Used for message end identification, the Modbus idle time is defined with 3.5
characters as a function of selected baud rate, and corresponds to approx. 4
milliseconds at 9600 baud. For adaptation to specific device configurations, this time
can be set in the EasyServe block. The setting acts both on EasyServe and fieldbus
interfaces.

Selected baud rate Modbus idle time in milliseconds


9600 4
19200 2
38400 1

When operating the EasyServe interface using a radio converter, the times stated in
table may be longer.

54 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Modbus

5.12 Settings on Modbus Master


! If data from various segments (see Fieldbus Data) are used, every segment
needs at least one message.
! Set correct byte sequence with values in the IEEE and LONG formats.
! Maximum admissible message length is 256 bytes including header and trailer
bytes.

5.13 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting


If you have activated (selected) one of the eligible fieldbus modules, any malfunction
is reported by event message "Communication Error Host (S9) provided that
message is assigned an event class other than IG(NORE). Message is output on
display and EasyServe. If only the display is available, continue reading from next
item. The EasyServe tool provides further information on error diagnosis.

Meaning of the Communication Host S9 event message

! Designed as general message for any fieldbus connection faults, this message
reports the following errors:
! Different station address on Master and scale
! Different baud rates on Master and scale
! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty
! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected; for proper connection, see
Fieldbus Hardware item.
! Bus termination absent or present multiple times. Check the jumpers in the
fieldbus connectors on the module. For details, see Fieldbus Hardware item.
! Selected protocol type does not correspond to add-on card. Change
parameterization or exchange module.
! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterization.
! Inadmissible ID detected in Master -> scale message.

See also Error Codes item.

EasyServe Fieldbus View


The representation of cyclic user data for all protocols is explained at the Fieldbus
Data item.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 55


Schenck Process
Modbus

5.14 Serial Bus Module (VSS021V - applies to VEG)


To provide a serial interface to the fieldbus Master, you can attach the module to the
INTECONT cover.

Bus termination

! The bus termination is realized using jumpers in the fieldbus connectors.


This ensures that the termination is preserved upon replacement of card.
! Am Busmaster sollten Sie einen 220 Ohm-Widerstand zur Terminierung
verwenden.

Baud rate, bus address, interface physics, data format

! All values are set via parameters. Depending on selected physics,


different connections must be realized on fieldbus connector (see below).

X20 "

Connector assignment X20

Pin No. RS 232 RS 422 RS 485


1 GND GND GND
2 TX TX- -
3 RX RX- RX-/TX-
4 - RX+ RX+/TX+
5 - TX+ -
6 - Bus termination Bus termination
7 - Bus termination Bus termination

56 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Modbus

Jumpers for interface physics and bus termination with RS485 (2-wire)

Bus terminal jumpers with RS422 (4-wire)

Characteristics

Isolation Optocouplers
Voltage supply 5V DC internal
Current supply max. 100mA
Connectors Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 1.5mm

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 57


Schenck Process
Modbus

5.15 Connection for serial interface S3 (RS485- VKG)

Contacts 6-7 and 8-9 are jumped for operating as an RS485-2-wire interface. An
additional 120 Ohm bus termination resistance should be installed for the last bus
subscribers.

5.16 tie-in diagram S3 as RS485-2-wire

If this interface is operated in the 4-wire mode, the termination resistor goes on the
reception side (PINS 6-9).

5.17 For Further Reading


Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. J/1996
BVH2098AA EASYSERVE

58 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6 Ethernet
This chapter describes all protocols and tools basing on Ethernet. At present, these
are the Modbus/TCP and Ethernet/IP application protocols.

Modbus/TCP
This uses the TCP/IP standard for data transmission and the application data appear
as a Modbus-RTU frame.
VEG:
Here, the Modbus/TCP interface is created via optional fieldbus card (VET020V).
VKG:
The Modbus/TCP and Ethernet/IP use the same Ethernet connection on the base
card. This makes it possible to connect the EasyServe via Modbus/TCP in parallel to
the Ethernet/IP fieldbus.

Ethernet/IP
EtherNet/IP adds the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) to standard Ethernet. This
is the same application protocol and object model used with DeviceNet. CIP facilitates
interoperability between devices from different manufacturers and sub-networks.
VEG:
Implemented with the optional fieldbus card (VET022V)
VKG:S. Note Modbus/TCP.

6.1 Ethernet Settings

Your INTECONT can be parameterized using the INTECONT control unit or the
EasyServe tool. The settings apply to Modbus/TCP and Ethernet/IP.
The parameter description holds for either system.

Parameter value range Default Explanation


value
IP address 1 0 255 192 Manual IP address assignment
IP address 2 0 255 168 (see above)
IP address 3 0 255 240 (see above)
IP address 4 0 255 1 (see above)
Network mask 1 0 255 255 Delegating the Subnetz mask
Network mask 2 0 255 255 (see above)
Network mask 3 0 255 255 (see above)
Network mask 4 0 255 0 (see above)
Gateway 1 0 255 0 Delegating the standard gateway
address
Gateway 2 0 255 0 (see above)
Gateway 3 0 255 0 (see above)
Gateway 4 0 255 0 (see above)

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 59


Schenck Process
Ethernet

Note
If you operate your INTECONT units on a local sub-network with specific network
card, we suggest to set the PC network adapter to the following values:
! IP address: 192.168.240.254
! Net mask: 255.255.255.0
! Gateway: 0.0.0.0
! INTECONT 1-n: 192.168.240.x wo x=1-n
! Always use unique IP addresses. Ask your system administrator for available
addresses.

6.2 Checking Station Addresses


You can check network parameters using the PING command available on any PC,
e.g. ping 192.168.240.1
If check is successful, reponse time of the final unit is displayed.

60 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.3 Modbus-TCP/IP

This item describes the functionality of INTECONT used as server on Ethernet.


In detail:
! Ethernet module (Ethernet Bus Module VET020V - VEG) item
! Ethernet module configuration (determine characteristics and assign station
addresses)
! FIELDBUS mode: Data exchange between Ethernet client and INTECONT via
Modbus/TCP
! WEB SERVER mode: Preparation and call of a WEB page
! Diagnosis and troubleshooting.

6.3.1 Commissioning Guideline


! Prepare hardware as described at Ethernet Bus Module VET020V (only VEG)
item.
! Activate protocol type Modbus-TCP on INTECONT.
! Parameterize Ethernet address on module.
! In FIELDBUS mode: Determine data to be transferred data IDs required (s.
Fieldbus Data item).
! Start communication through Master (FIELDBUS mode).
! Call WEB page in WEB SERVER mode.

6.3.2 Ethernet Module Functions

! Connect module using RJ45 connector.


! The server can exchange data with as many as 3 clients simultaneously in
fieldbus mode. If the EasyServe tool is used, it can occupy one of the three
channels if the coupling is performed over the network. The data are either sent
as Modbus (RTU)/TCP packets or are expected as such from external. The
functional range is described in more detail below.
! Monitoring the bus interface
! Easy to parameterise the interface using the basic model's operating station or
the EasyServe diagnostic tool.

6.3.3 Fieldbus Mode

In FIELDBUS mode, INTECONT behaves like a Modbus/TCP server in accordance


with standard OPEN MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION, Release 1.0, 29 March 1999
and masters all function codes of Classes 1 and 2 (save FC7) as well as the most
significant codes of Class 2 (FC15 and 23).
Data representation is totally oriented to the Modbus standard. The TCP safety layer
performs the function of the check sum (CRC16) of the Modbus message. Of the 6-
byte message header defined in the OPEN MODBUS standard, INTECONT only uses
the 6th byte to transfer the data length. The residual bytes are returned in the response
in ratio 1:1.
To enable later extensions, these header bytes (1-5) should not be used; set them to
ZERO.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 61


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.3.4 Station Addresses

In the Ethernet network, all stations are clearly identified by their IP addresses.
Therefore the Modbus slave address can always be set to value 1.

6.3.5 Function Codes (FC)

The list below explains the codes used:

FC [dec] Meaning
1 Bitwise re-reading of control information (one/multiple bits)
2 Bitwise re-reading of status information (one/multiple bits)
3 Wordwise (re)reading of setpoints, measurement, LONG and parameter
values (one/multiple words)
4 Wordwise reading of status information (one/multiple words)
5 Bitwise (re)setting of control information (always 1 bit)
6 Wordwise writing of control bits or setpoints (always 1 data word)
8 Diagnosis (sub-codes 0 and 1 only)
15 Bitwise writing of control information (one/(multiple bits)
16 Wordwise writing of commands (one/multiple data words)
23 Wordwise writing and simultaneous reading of data (one/multiple data
words)

6.3.6 Transmission Protection

With Modbus/TCP, the transmission is protected by the safety measures of the TCP
layer.

6.3.7 Error Codes

Only error codes 01 to 03 are used. Upon CRC error, no reponse is sent.
All errors described below are comprised in system in the form of general error
message Communication Error Host. This message includes the timeout.

Error Code Meaning


1 Station does not support requested function (FC).
2 Wrong data address
! ID or SC out of range
! Data offset + length excessive
3 Wrong data type
! Wrong data with FC 5 (admissible: 0xff00 and 0x0000)
! Data length < 0
! Requested length exceeded
! Data address with IEEE or INT32 values odd

62 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.3.8 Data Formats

Transmission starts with MSB. Setpoints and measurement values are transferred in
the IEEE float format (IEEE754, 32 bits). All control information and statusses are
represented in form of a binary signal using the 8 data bits of each character. In
addition, all control and status information can be treated as single bit information.

6.3.9 Process Values

Every cyclic data segment includes values of the same type. The addresses of the
data within a segment are consecutively added. The data of a segment can be read or
written using a single message.

6.3.10 Parameters

All parameters can be read and written. In contrast to cyclic values, however, only one
parameter per message can be processed. Transmission requires the parameter ID
unique throughout the system. For some significant parameters of scale type VLW,
these IDs can be found in the list of fieldbus data. For residual parameters, EasyServe
can prepare a list complete with IDs.
Note: Menu item EXTRAS-OPTIONS-PARAMETERS-Print SysID lets you activate
printout of IDs to be used for data address of the Modbus protocol. Please note that
special knowledge is required to edit the selection parameters. Floating point and/or
integer values can be read and written without any problems. The data formats
correspond to those of the cyclic values.

Note:
Parameters preset via fieldbus are accepted only if parameter mode is not active at
the same time.

6.3.11 Data Exchange Overview

In many cases, the host system must add a so-called segment address (depending
on function code) to the described data address. Furthermore, the data address must
be incremented by 1 since the Modbus protocols register addresses start from 1.
So the data address is configured like this:
Data Address = Segment Address + INTECONT Address + 1.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 63


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.3.12 Message Samples

The following lines show the construction of the Modbus/TCP messages. The first
column represents the message from bus Master to scale; the second, the scale
response.

Data to scale Scale response Meaning


00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 06
Start scale (single-bit command)
01 05 0140 ff00 01 05 0140 ff00
00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 06
Stop scale (single-bit command)
01 05 0141 ff00 01 05 0141 ff00
00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 06
Reset counter 1 (preset word)
01 06 0140 0040 01 06 0140 0040
00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 0B Read 4 words of status information
01 03 02F0 0004 01 03 08 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx = data, cc = CRC16
00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 07 Read parameter (nominal feed rate,
01 03 1082 0002 01 03 04 42C8 0000 ID=1082 (hex), value = 100))
00 00 00 00 00 0B 00 00 00 00 00 06
Write parameter (value =163.34)
01 10 1082 0002 04 4323 5678 01 10 1082 0002

6.3.13 Settings on Modbus/TCP Slave (INTECONT)

Parameter Value Range Default Explanation

Protocol Type Any fieldbus NO Select protocol: here Modbus/TCP


protocol
Host Timeout 5 ... 300 s 10 s Serves for interface monitoring.
Values less than 5 are limited to
the minimum value.
Communication W2 (Warning 2), IG Class of communication error
Error Host W1 (Warning 1),
A(LARM),
IG(nore)
WEB Coding HTML, XML XML Determines type of WEB page
(only VEG) coding. If XML is selected, data in
browser are represented by the
style sheet.
DHCP NO NO The IP address is assigned on
(only VEG) device or configuration tool
(EasyServe).

64 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.3.14 Settings on Modbus/TCP Master

! If data from various segments are used (s. Fieldbus Data), every segment needs
at least one message.
! Set correct byte sequence for values in the IEEE and LONG formats.
! Maximum admissible message length is 256 bytes including header and trailor
bytes.

6.3.15 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

If you have activated (selected) one of the eligible fieldbus modules, any malfunction
is reported by event message "Communication Error Host (S9) provided that
message is assigned an event class other than IG(NORE). Message is output on
display and EasyServe. If only the display is available, continue reading from next
item. The EasyServe tool provides further information on error diagnosis.

Note
An internal communication fault (fieldbus card INTECONT main board) produces a
timeout on fieldbus Master. To remove, restart your INTECONT.

Event message Communication Host S9

Designed as general message for any fieldbus connection faults, this message reports
the following errors:
! Different station address on Master and scale
! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty
! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected; for proper connection, see
Fieldbus Hardware item.
! Selected protocol type does not correspond to add-on card. Change
parameterization or exchange module.
! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterization.
! Inadmissible ID (data address) detected in Master -> scale message.

See also Error Codes and "Interface Configuration items.

Monitoring the Fieldbus channels (VEG)


Only the channel with writing authorisation is monitored when fieldbus channels are
monitored for error indication and safety turn-off for the scale. Communication faults
are only shown for this channel. Setting the event class for the Host Communication
Fault to ALARM switches off the scale and all static command bits are put in the safe
state.

One exception: It also shows the Host Communication Fault if there is no fieldbus
channel that has acquired the specification right and if the fieldbus has already been
activated. In this case, the fault message can only be suppressed by changing the
event class to IGNORE.

In terms of this monitoring strategy, EasyServe is not considered to be a Fieldbus


client. The special settings in the relevant parameter block apply to EasyServe and
also the same rules with regard to logging on and off apply as with a serial coupling.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 65


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.3.16 Ethernet Bus Module (VET020V VEG)

You can also attach the module to the INTECONT PLUS cover in order to provide an
Ethernet interface (10BaseT) to the TCP client. Plug jumper W100 (determining
voltage supply) in position 2-3.

X20 "

Pin Assignment X20 (RJ45)

Pin Meaning
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 --
5 --
6 RX-

LEDs on the communication module

Green on / red off Communication is taking place via one of the field bus channels.
The telegrams are free of error.
Green on / red on Communication running, but an error exists (wrong ID, wrong
function code, wrong length)
All off No field bus client active or the mod bus/TCP protocol has not
been preselected.

Features

Separation Yes
Voltage supply 5V DC internal
Current supply Max 500mA
Ethernet topology 10BaseT
Connector RJ45

66 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.3.17 Ethernet connection VKG

The VKG scenario uses the standard Ethernet connection on the base board.

Netblock LED:
1 Link (green): Ethernet has the connection
2 FDX (yellow): full duplex
3 100 (red): 100 Mbaud (otherwise 10 Mbaud)

6.3.18 For Further Reading

OPEN MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION Schneider Electric, Release 1.0,


29 March 1999
Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. J/1996

Note
All external documents, updates and examples listed here can be loaded from the
service page of Schenck Process GmbH (http://support.schenckprocess.com, path:
Bus Systeme-TCP).

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 67


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.4 Ethernet/IP

6.4.1 Commissioning Guidelines

! Prepare hardware as described at item Ethernet Bus Module VET022V(VEG).


! Activate protocol type "Ethernet/IP" on INTECONT.
! Parameterize Ethernet address on module.
! Select process image and determine data to be transmitted.
! Start communication through Master (FIELDBUS mode).
! Call WEB page in WEB SERVER mode.

6.4.2 Ethernet Module Functions

! Connect module using RJ45 connector.


! In FIELDBUS mode, server can exchange data of multiple clients at the same
time. Ethernet/IP and Modbus/TCP are available as protocols. The process
image of the two protocols is the same. The communication module is not
designed to block any attempt to write, i.e. the last client having sent preset
values is the winner.
! The module can be used as Group 2 and 3 server on the Ethernet/IP network.
For more information, see ODVA WEB page.
! When using the Modbus/TCP protocol, the rules of Modbus/TCP specification
V1.0 apply. For details, see MODBUS.ORG or SCHENCK PROCESS Service
WEB pages.
! Bus interface is monitored.
! Easy parameterization of VET022V using base unit control station or EasyServe
diagnostic tool.

6.4.3 Fieldbus Mode


In FIELDBUS mode, INTECONT behaves like an Ethernet/IP or Modbus/TCP server.
The comments below dedicate to Ethernet/IP. For Modbus/TCP, a different
communication module is available, better suited to use the device features. For
protocol itself, see separate item.

6.4.4 User Data Construction


For details and examples on user data construction, see Fieldbus Data item.

6.4.5 Settings on Ethernet/IP-Slave (INTECONT)

Parameter Value Range Default Explanation

Protocol Type Any fieldbus NO Select protocol: here Ethernet/IP


protocol
Host Timeout 5 ... 300 s 10 s Serves for interface monitoring.
Values less than 5 are limited to
the minimum value.
Communication W2 (Warning 2), IG Class of communication error
Error Host W1 (Warning 1),
A(LARM),
IG(nore)

68 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Ethernet

Parameter Value Range Default Explanation

Byte sequence High-Low High- Swaps byte sequence in every user


Low-High Low data word
Word sequence I:std / L:std I:std / Determines the word sequence
I:swp / L:std L:std during transmission of
I:std / L:swp measurement values in the
I:swp / L:swp I(EEE)-/L(ONG) format. Also swaps
analog preset values.
Configuration FIXED, FIXED The parameter specifies the
NO_PARA_ID, process image
PARA_ID,
PARA_6ID

Any change to a grey-marked parameter resets the field connection, i.e. the slave is
excluded from user data exchange for approx. 4 sec.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 69


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.4.6 Configuration of the network in RSLogix 5000"

! Create a new project in RSLogix


! Configure the controller
! Select the EtherNet/IP bridge
! Configure the EtherNet/IP Bridge
! Add the INTECONT Satus station to the I/O configuration
! Add a generic Ethernet module
! Configure the new Ethernet/IP module

! Set connection options for INTECONT

! Download the configuration

70 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.4.7 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

If you have activated (selected) one of the eligible fieldbus modules, any malfunction
is reported by event message "Communication Error Host (S9) provided that
message is assigned an event class other than IG(NORE). Message is output on
display and EasyServe. If only the display is available, continue reading from next
items. The EasyServe tool, if present, provides further information on error diagnosis.

Event message Communication Host S9

Designed as general message for any fieldbus connection faults, this message reports
the following errors:
! Different station addresses on Master and scale
! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty
! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected; for proper connection, see
Fieldbus Hardware item.
! Selected protocol type does not correspond to add-on card. Change
parameterization or exchange module.
! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterization.
! Inadmissible ID detected in Master -> scale message (exclusively use bold IDs).
! All preset IDs in host system message are set to zero (communication between
Master-CPU and communication processor (CP) failed). At least one preset ID
must be set to a correct value (unequal to zero); or Release bit set in FIXED
mode.
! If, despite established data communication, the data of the INTECONT (VKG) is
not updated, it is probably because the Ethernet/IP option is not activated (see
BVH2346, chapter Set options).

EasyServe Fieldbus View

The representation of cyclic user data for all protocols is explained at the Fieldbus
Data item.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 71


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.4.8 Ethernet Bus Module (VET022V) for VEG

To provide an Ethernet interface (10/100 BaseT) to the TCP client, you can also
attach the module to the INTECONT cover. To do so, plug jumper W100 (determine
power supply) in position 2-3.

X20 "

Pin assignment X20 (RJ45)

Pin Meaning
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 --
5 --
6 RX-

Characteristics

Separation Yes
Voltage supply 5V DC internal
Current supply Max 500mA
Ethernet topology 10/100 BaseT
Connector RJ45

72 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Ethernet

6.5 Ethernet connection VKG

Netblock LED:
1 Link (green): Ethernet has the connection
2 FDX (yellow): full duplex
3 100 (red): 100 Mbaud (otherwise 10 Mbaud)

6.5.1 For Further Reading

Ethernet/IP Specification www.odva.org


ANYBUS-IC Design Guide www.hms-networks.com
ANYBUS-IC Fieldbus Appendix www.hms-networks.com
Network Analyzer (Packetyzer) www.packetyzer.com

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 73


Schenck Process
Application Examples

7 Application Examples
7.1 Zeroing and Taring Weighfeeders / Belt Weighers

Step ID ID Comment
dec. hex.

Leave normal mode and prepare Zeroing and Taring


1 Turn OFF 321 0x141 for batch to be deselected
2 Abort batch 338 0x152 for batch to be deselected
3 Deselect batch 337 0x151
4 Select volumetric mode 324 0x144 Speed proportional to setpoint
5 Close prefeeder 351 0x15F Prefeeder and feed gate remain
closed also if setpoint is not zero.
6 Turn ON 320 0x140
Setpoint needs not be 0.

Belt is running proportionally to setpoint.


If P=Po then v=vo; if P=Pn then v=vn.

Continue belt run until belt load is almost 0.


7 Read belt load 1880 0x758
Select zeroing or taring and continue accordingly.
! Zeroing: Item 8 and 9
! Taring: Item 10 and 11
Zeroing
8 Start Zeroing 367 0x171
9 Check statuses 776 0x308

Taring
10 Start Taring 368 0x170 Ensure that statuses are
11 Check statuses 777 0x309 available during zeroing, or taring.
12 Wait for status change. 817 0x331 Wait for acknowledgement.
Nullstellen (Step 13)
13 Calibration results included 1964 0x7A Deviation from last zero set or taring
in measurement values C
Tarieren (Step 14)
14 1966 0x7A New value for tare (P09.04) or
E tare correction (P09.05)
Acquire calibration result (Step 15)
15 379 0x17B Acceptance command
Check belt load If you select acquisition, make sure
1880 0x758 belt
load measurement value is zero (=
oscillates around zero point).
Reject calibration result and abort (Step 16)
16 380 0x17C
Return to Normal Mode
17 Turn OFF 321 0x141
18 Activate batch (if desired). 336 0x150
19 Involve prefeeder 350 0x15E
20 Gravimetrisch aktivieren 325 0x145
21 Enter desired setpoint; if need be, also batch setpoint.
22 Continue in normal mode.

74 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
Application Examples

7.2 Batching via fieldbus

Please remember that not all actions are available for all scale types. You can
ascertain availability in the list of cyclical data.
You can also use the FIXED mode with the exception of the data specified under item
7.

Step Control system action Data Type ID hex. ID dec. Remarks

Preparations:
Set the turn-on source parameter (control sources block) and batch setpoint source (batching operation block) on
DISOCONT and INTECONT PLUS to FB

1 Activate batching mode Command 150 336 Positive flank


This is still maintained if there is a
power failure in the scale.
2 Specify the batch setpoint [kg] Setpoint 252 594 Batch setpoints sent when the
(IEEE float) batch is in progress only go to
effect when the next batch is
started.
3 Specify the batch number Setpoint 256 598
(IEEE float)
4 Start the batch Command 140 320 Positive flank

5 Make an active test of the Status information 301 769 Log. 1 during full feed/dribble feed
batch and afterflow time
6 Test the batch pre-act contact Status information 302 770 Dribble feed reached

7 Query the digital outputs on Status information 590 1424 Not in the FIXED mode
the scale
(such as scale on/off and
prefeeder on/off)
8 Interrupt the batch Command 141 321 Positive flank
You can continue the batch in
progress with the start command
9 Let batch continue Command 140 320 Positive flank

10 End batch Command 152 160 Positive flank


Any subsequent start command
starts a new batch while the last
batch is not continued.
11 Query the remaining batch Readings 76A 1898 The quantity still to be discharged
quantity [kg] (IEEE float)
12 Actual batch value [kg] Readings 768 1896 The quantity already discharged
(IEEE float)
13 Deselect batch Command 151 15F Positive flank
This deactivates batching mode

NO_PARA_ID no parameters, 3 predetermination values, 6 reading values

Commands V- Commands V- Batch L- L- L- L- L- L- 0


V-
4+5 ID2 6+7 ID3 setpoint ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6
ID1

Status 2+3 Current Status 4+5 Status 6+7 Digital Actual Counter 1 Highest-
feed rate outputs batch priority
(ID 02F0) (ID 0750) (ID 0310) (ID 0330) value (ID 0752) event
(ID 0590) (ID 0610)
((ID 0768)

V-ID1 0140 commands 4+5 start, stop and reset counter, etc.

INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 75


Schenck Process
Application Examples

V-ID2 0160 commands 6+7 wg. Start zero setting+ accept calibration result/abort
calibration
V-ID3 0252 batch setpoint

L-ID1 0310 Status 4+5 wg. Query whether the batch is active at clear
L-ID2 0330 Status 6+7 wg. Calibration + wait for acknowledgement
L-ID3 0590 digital outputs wg. Scale on/off + prefeeder on/off
L-ID4 0768 actual batch value
L-ID5 0752 counter 1
L-ID6 0610 highest-priority event

76 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description


Schenck Process
DISOMAT Satus
System Manual

BV-H2331GB
PASS - Service you can rely on.
Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world

Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service
concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless support
across the entire product life cycle.

With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever and wherever
you need us. It doesnt matter where you are, our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best in worldwide,
personal, comprehensive service.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on hand to analyse problems and failures.
Look at www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck Process Location.

Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System provides you with the best
service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?
Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections
through to full service. Interested? Then find out more about the individual components at
www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.

Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline in Germany


Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock to
deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.

J +49 171 2 251195 Heavy and Light excluding Static Weighing Equipment

J +49 172 6 501700 Transport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment

by Schenck Process GmbH, 2008


Pallaswiesenstrae 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany
J +49 61 51-15 31 0
www.schenckprocess.com

All information is given without obligation. All specifications are subject to change.

Note: Translation of the original instructions


Contents
1 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 System characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 For systems in zone 1 explosive areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1 Control displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4 Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.1 Instructions for specific applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.2 Some examples of applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.3 Assembly in the 19 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.4 Field case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5 Connecting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.1 Connection assignment: non-explosive zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.2 Load cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.3 Digital inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.4 Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.5 Instruction for connecting the serial S3 interface (RS485) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.6 Connecting DISOMAT Satus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
with the VNT power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.7 Connection for the power supply for the VFG 20910 field device (115/230 VAC) . . . . . . 20
5.8 Protection against EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.9 Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.10 Connections into the explosive zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6 Bus coupling modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.1 Profibus VPB 020 coupler module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.2 Profibus module (VPB8020). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.4 Fieldbus monitoring (Profibus-DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.5 VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.6 DeviceNet module (VCB8020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
7 Analog display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
8 Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
8.1 Serial connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
8.2 DISOMAT Opus / Satus / Tersus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
8.3 Parametrization and calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
8.4 Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
8.5 Function Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.6 Loading language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.7 Backup and Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.8 Loading flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.9 Product Service Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
9 Using DISOMAT as a weighing transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
10 Batching with DISOMAT Satus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
10.1 Filling Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
10.2 Dispatch Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10.3 Materiald data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
11 Data processing interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
11.1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 I1


Schenck Process
11.2 List of procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.3 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.3.1.1 Schenck Process poll procedure (DDP 8785) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.3.1.1 Procedure agreements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.3.1.2 Schenck Process poll procedure (DDP 8785) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
11.3.1.2 Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
11.3.2.1 Siemens procedure 3964R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
11.3.2.1 Procedure agreements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
11.3.3.1 SIMATIC S5 control system (RK512). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
11.3.3.1 Procedure agreements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
11.3.3.2 SIMATIC S5 control system (RK512). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
11.3.3.2 Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
11.3.3.3 SIMATIC S5 control system (RK512). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
11.3.3.3 Examples for SIMATIC S5 messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
11.3.4.1 Teleperm M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
11.3.4.1 Procedure agreements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
11.4 The structure of the utility data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
11.5 Data processing commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
12 Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
13 Event Message Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
13 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
15 Equipment supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
16 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
16.1 Fieldbus accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

I2 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
The Manual

This manual describes the DISOMAT Satus control electronics, called DISOMAT
or the system below
It explains:
How it works
Connection diagrams
Accessories
for the VSE 20900, VFG 20900 and VFG 20910 system versions
This manual is valid starting from the VWW 20900-004 firmware version

You can find additional information (such as other details on the fieldbus
couplings) in the following manuals for the DISOMAT system.

n DISOMAT Data Communication, Bplus, DISOMAT Opus,


DISOMAT Satus, DISOBOX Data Communication BV-H 2359

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 i


Schenck Process
- Reserved for users notes -

ii BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Safety Instructions

1 Safety Instructions
Using for the Intended Purpose

The measuring system with the mechanical components connected to it is only


intended for weighing and control applications directly associated with that. Any
use beyond that is considered not intended.

Sources of danger
The measuring system does not generate any hazards during weighing operation
if the system is properly installed and put into service.
Using the measuring system might be dangerous if the system takes on contral
applications or when the material weighed is transported. Potential sources of
danger would then be add-on equipment that the material weighed is transported
or metered in. In these cases, the measuring system may cause residual hazards
if untrained staff uses or operates it incorrectly..
This measuring system may be a component of a more complex system. The user
is fully responsible for overall plant safety.

Labeling residual hazards


The presence of this symbol indicates that the machine or component used has
the potential to cause severe injury or death.

This symbol labels signs on hazard that could cause property damage to the
measuring system or other system components.

Personnel
Only skilled persons may prepare, install, start-up, operate, maintain and service
these systems.
Everyone doing work on the measuring system should read the safety instructions
and be aware of and follow the parts of the service manual applicable to them.
The operator should use the service manual to instruct the operating personnel to
comply with all regulations and instructions.

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 1


Schenck Process
Safety Instructions

Changing parameters
The parameters dictate how the measuring system functions. Only persons
familiar with how the system functions should be allowed to change these
parameters (such as with Schenck Process training). Incorrectly set parameters
may cause injuries to persons or damage to the machine whenever user control
systems are connected. They can also adversely affect weighing operation.

Password
Parameters are protected by password from unauthorised changes. The
measuring system operator should act responsibly with the password.

Acknowledging fault messages


Fault messages may only be acknowledged after the cause of the fault has been
rectified.
Before acknowledging a fault, please ensure that connected peripheral units are
functioning properly. Check to see that any connected control systems are in safe
state.

Service and maintenance


Please follow all warning signs on the scale.
Please shut off the measuring system before working on the mechanical
equipment or peripheral units (particularly control systems). Take appropriate
action to ensure that the measuring system cannot be inadvertently restarted.
Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply
(pull the plug).

Moisture and humidity


All of the parts of the scale (particularly electrical components) have to be
protected from moisture and humidity when the housing is open such as during
service work. Beyond this, the protection classes of the housing should be
observed.

Design modifications
Modifications to the measuring system and/or use of replacement parts not
supplied by Schenck Process renders Schencks liability null and void for resulting
damage. This particularly applies to modifications, which have the potential to
affect the operating safety of the measuring system.

Replacing parts
Only use original Schenck Process replacement parts for repair. Using other spare
parts renders the warranty invalid.

2 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
System characteristics 2.1 General Information

2 System characteristics
2.1 General Information
DISOMAT Satus is a measuring amplifier for forming and monitoring weight
readings.
Its standard equipment is:
n A load cell connection for measurement transducers (such as Schenck Pro-
cess-RT load cells or Schenck Process measuring eyes)
n a serial service interface for configuring with a PC or VT terminal
n two serial data processing interfaces for transmitting data to a higher-level data
processing system
n one analog output
n 4 output contacts (relays)
n 3 input contacts (optocouplers)

DISOMAT Satus is particularly suited to systems that measure and/or monitor


the weights of a number of individual scales. It can be connected to a process
control system
via analog output or
to a data processing system via serial interface or
fieldbus.
A typical area of application is fill level monitoring in multiple-hopper systems.
DISOMAT Satus can also be used as a filling or dispatch scale using the serial
interface to control the batching process (for instance, presetting the setpoint or
feed ON/OFF).

Control LEDs display the most important operating states of DISOMAT Satus
while the DISOPLAN PC software package is for easy and convenient start-up.

DISOMAT Satus is installed in a field case or a 19 module assembly frame. The


voltage is supplied by a local 24 V = supply, the power supply unit in the 19
module assembly frame or a transformer in the field case.

Several DISOMAT Satus units can be integrated in Profibus and DeviceNet


networks with optional fieldbus upgrades.
The standard interface for integrating in Ethernet networks via MODBUS-TCP and
Ethernet-IP protocols are available in the unit.

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 3


Schenck Process
2.2 For systems in System characteristics

2.2 For systems in


zone 1 explosive areas

Fig. 1:

The VXB 209... protective circuits are part of the equipment that disconnects
intrinsically safe circuits from those that are not intrinsically safe. They have to be
built in an safe area. The components installed for limiting current and voltage
provide the explosion protection while retaining the galvanic connection to the
circuits.

Intended Use

The protective circuit is made of a Z barrier for:


n the load cell(s)
n 2 binary inputs
n the serial secondary display
n the analog output (4-20 mA)

You can find details on using the VXB 209... protective circuit in the BV-H2330
Safety Instructions.

4 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Start-Up 3.1 Control displays

3 Start-Up
3.1 Control displays
An der Frontplatte des DISOMAT Satus befinden sich 8 Leutdioden, die
Betriebszustnde des DISOMAT Satus signalisieren.

Fig. 2:

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 5


Schenck Process
3.1 Control displays Start-Up

The version with a display (VSE 20910) also has a 3 1/2 digit red LED display and
3 operating buttons (figure). Chapter 7. describes how the display is connected
and adjusted while the function of the keys depends on the chosen configuration.

Fig. 3:

6 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Planning

4 Planning
The VFE 900 main card has all of the components for normal operation: the
measuring circuit, CPU, power supply unit, serial interface for connecting up to a
data processing system, 4 safely disconnected relay outputs, 4 optocoupler inputs
and one analog output.

The Components and How They Function


Designation Function
DISOMAT Satus = VSE 20900 Measuring and Monitoring Weights and Data Trans-
Main Card mission to Higher-Level Data Processing Systems

DISOMAT Satus = Main card Measuring and monitoring weights and showing
with the display and operating them on a 3-digit LED display. The operating but-
buttons: VSE 20910 ton for Set tare / Clear tare / Zero setting.
19 VNG 900 module assembly Space for as much as 10 DISOMAT Satus or 5
frame (without racks and with DISOMAT Satus and 5 VXB oer 5 DISOMAT Sa-
blank panels) tus VSE20910 or 9 DISOMAT Satus + 1 VNT 3xx
power supply unit

VNT20900 power supply unit Power supply for as much as 6 DISOMAT Satus in
VNT20910 the 19 module assembly frame for as many as 9
VNT20930 DISOMAT Use Satus VNT 20930

VFG20900 field case Space for one DISOMAT Satus

VFG20910 field case Space for one DISOMAT Satus including the trans-
former (230/115 V) for its power supply

VPB 020 Profibus card Integrating into the Profibus or DeviceNet systems
VCB 020 DeviceNet card

VXB 209 ex interface module... intrinsically safe connection for components used in
explosive zones such as Schenck-RT load cells
(DISOMAT Satus outside of the explosive zone!)

DISOPLAN for convenient start-up under MS-Windows XP/2000

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 7


Schenck Process
4.1 Instructions for specific applications Planning

4.1 Instructions for specific applications


Connecting several load cells/measuring eyes
To connect several load cells or measuring eyes to DISOMAT Satus, you need a
DKK 69/70 interconnecting box (for as many as 4 load cells) or a DKK6 (for 6 load
cells) or a VKK 28008 (for 8 load cells) with overload protection wherever required.

The Control System of DISOMAT Satus


(such as with a data processing system, process control system or PLC)
You can trigger one single DISOMAT Satus via serial or analog interface,
although several DISOMAT Satus have to be controlled. There are the following
options for solving this problem:
n The control system has enough analog interfaces (such as the process control
system or PLS)
n They control the DISOMAT Satus units via the compatible-for-bus RS 485 in-
terface with a MODBUS/J-Bus protocol and a data processing system.
n You couple the DISOMAT Satus units via fieldbus upgrade.
n You couple via built-in Ethernet interface (MODBUS-TCP or Ethernet-IP proto-
col).

Maximum distances
The acceptable distances between DISOMAT Satus and peripheral units
connected to it depend on what interface the peripheral units are operated on.

Serial computer interface

Interface Maximum cable length


RS 232 15 m
RS 485, 2-wire 800 m at the maximum baudrate of 9,600 baud
(compatible for bus with a maximum of 16 bus sub-
scribers)

Analog interface
n 300 m

Connecting the load cells


n 1,000 m with Schenck Process load cells and Schenck Process measuring
eyes (8 x 0.5 mm measuring cable)

8 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Planning 4.2 Some examples of applications

4.2 Some examples of applications


The graph below shows all options for connecting up and upgrading a DISOMAT
Satus. The connecting options are shown in broken lines.

Fig. 5:

First example: DISOMAT Satus in a non-explosive zone via analog interface on a process control
system

Fig. 4:

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 9


Schenck Process
4.2 Some examples of applications Planning

Second example: DISOMAT Satus in the Profibus with a VPB fieldbus card

Fig. 7:

Third example:DISOMAT Satus with a scale, display and control system in an explosive zone

Fig. 6:

10 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Planning 4.3 Assembly in the 19 rack

4.3 Assembly in the 19 rack


19 subassemblies of DISOMAT Satus have the dimensions below:
Height
129 mm (3HE)

The width of the standard subassemblies


VSE 20900
VXB 209xx
VNT
41 mm (8TE)

The version with the display (VSE 20910) is twice as wide (82 mm)

The depth of the boards is 270 mm


Installation depth including the plug and cable outlet: 330 mm

It is best to use the DNG 900 rack for assembling the components.
This is either is supplied complete with DISOMAT Satus subassemblies when
ordered or empty with the equipped blank panels. You can also use any 19
systems for installation, although the cable have to be carefully supported
(mechanically with strain relief and electrically with cable shields).
The rack takes a maximum of 10 subassemblies where units with a display require
2 slots.
An example of maximum fitting:
10x VSE 20900 24 VDC feed
9x VSE 20900 network feed
5x VSE 20900 with VXB safety barrier, 24 VDC
4x VSE 20900 with VXB safety barrier, network feed
5x VSE 20910 24 VDC
A power supply unit is always mounted on the far right side of the rack. Bus cards,
Profibus and DeviceNet are mounted directly on DISOMAT. You do not need any
additional space in the rack.

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 11


Schenck Process
4.4 Field case Planning

4.4 Field case

Fig. 8:

12 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit 4.4 Field case

5 Connecting the Unit


Figure 9 shows the location of the terminals

Fig. 9

1: power supply
digital outputs
digital inputs
analog output
2: serial interface S2 (RS 232)
serial interface S3 (RS 485)
load cell connection
3: serial interface S1 (RS 232)
4: network connection (Ethernet)
5: Adapter plug for the fieldbus modules

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 13


Schenck Process
5.1 Connection assignment: non-explosive zone Connecting the Unit

5.1 Connection assignment: non-explosive zone

Fig. 10:

* You can use a fourth


input contact after removing the encoder pin from X1.1B Pin4.

14 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
5.2

The power cable for Potential equalization rail Potential Equalization Line
2
Signal the DVC platform scale
4x2x0,5 mm2 7x0,5 mm

Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit

28 RD 28 RD
BK BK/WH BK BK (BN) 82 BK 82 BK
Supply Voltage +82
Load cells

82.1 82.1 +
BL BU/WH BU BL 82
Supply Voltage -81 27 WH 27 WH - 27 28 +
YE YE GR 81.1
Supply Sense+82.1 81.1 81
-
Supply Sense -81.1 GN GN GN 81 BU 81 BU
50 50 YE/BK
Load Cell Signal +28 RD RD RD YE/BK
Junction Box To Potential Equalization
Load Cell Signal -27 WH GR WH (if required)
28 Line On Junction Box
RD
Screen plate 50 Screen NF

Fig. 11: Schenck RT-weighing cell connection


82 BK
Totally 82.1 +
Totally 82
Screened
Screened 27 WH
screened in - 27 28 +
pairs 81.1 81
-
81 BU
50
YE/BK

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0822


To Potential Equalization
Line On Junction Box
28 RD
82 BK
82.1 +
82
27 WH - 27 28 +
81.1 81
-
81 BU

Circuit board
- Load Cell Signal 27
27 50
28 + Load Cell Signal 28
82.1 YE/BK
NV To Potential Equalization
81.1 Line On Junction Box
+ Supply Sense 28
82.1 82 RD
- Supply Sense
81.1 82 BK
+ Supply Voltage
82 81 82.1
- Supply Voltage 82
81 27 WH - 27 28 +
Memory for 81.1 81
calibration data On Screen Plate -
Screen plate 81
Junction Box BU
(DKK 6,69,70) 50 50 Load Cells
YE/BK YE/BK
Jumper for write-protection of calibration
data (jumper open = parameters can be written) vh231001.cdr
5.2 Load cells

15
5.2 Load cells Connecting the Unit

If the scale design provides the ground connection from a load cell body, it is not
necessary to connect it via PAS.
The cable screen does not need to be connected to terminal 50 of the
interconnecting box for load cells whose connecting cable shield is connected to
the load cell body (e.g. Schenck VBB).
In this case, the shield is connected via the load cell body and PAS or ground.
Please refer to the manufacturers instructions for details on connecting more load
cells.

5.2.1 Preparing the load cell plug


The memory chip for setting and adjustment data has to be mounted before
connecting the load cell cable.
The chip is attached to the unit.
Remove connection 1 of the chip (refer to the figure; the flat side is upwards)
It is connected on pins 2 and 3 of the plug as shown (refer to the figure; the flat
side is upwards)
The parameters are write-protected with a jumper between pins 1 and 3.

Fig. 12

Fig. 13

16 BV-H2331GB / 0822 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit 5.2 Load cells

Signal 4 x 2 x 0.5 mm2 4 x 2 x 0.5 mm2 7 x 0.5 mm2


4 x 2 x 0.23 mm2
ULC+/82 BKs4 + BK/WHs1 GNs4 + YEs1 gn (BK)
ULC-/81 BUs4 + BU/WHs1 BNs4 + WHs1 BN/BU (BU)
Usense+/82.1 GYs2 GNs2 GN/BU (YE)
Usense-/81.1 GNs2 WHs2 WH/BU (GN)
UMeas+/28 RDs3 BNs3 bn (RD)
UMeas-/27 WHs3 WHs3 wh (GR)
Shield/50 Shield Shield NC * (NC)*
s1, s2, s3, s4 = screened in pairs
Schenck Process 3849.807 / 3849.809 / 3849.810 / 3849.009 3849.717 / 3849.718
material no. 3849.808 (3849.701 / 3849.711)

*Neutral colour

Strands colour-coded as per DIN IEC

German

BK black
BN brown
RD red
OG orange
YE yellow
GN green
BU blue
VT violet
GY grey
WH white
PK pink
GD gold
TQ turquoise
SR silver

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 17


Schenck Process
5.4 Relay outputs Connecting the Unit

5.3 Digital inputs

Fig. 15: Inputs connection diagram

5.4 Relay outputs

Fig. 14: Relay outputs connection diagram

18 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit 5.5 Instruction for connecting the serial

5.5 Instruction for connecting the serial


S3 interface (RS485)
Contacts 6-7 and 8-9 are jumped to operate it as a RS485 2-wire interface and an
120-Ohm bus termination resistor should be mounted for the last bus subscriber.

Fig. 16: Connection diagram S3 as RS485-2

If this interface is operated in the 4-wire mode, the termination resistor goes on the
reception side (PINS 6-9).

5.5.1 Connnecting a PC or VT terminal to the S1 service


interface

Pin assignment: Use a null modem cable for connections (length < 3m)

Pin 2: RxD

Pin 3: TxD

Pin 5: 0 V

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 19


Schenck Process
5.7 Connection for the power supply for the Connecting the Unit

5.6 Connecting DISOMAT Satus


with the VNT power supply unit

Fig. 17:

5.7 Connection for the power supply for the


VFG 20910 field device (115/230 VAC)
There is a mains transformer in the VFG20910 field device. The terminals of the
transformer are labelled.
They are connected to the terminals depending on the mains voltage.
Terminals
0 and 230 V
or 0 and 115 V

0 115V 230V X

20 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit 5.9 Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier

5.8 Protection against EMC


Please do the following to guarantee optimum EMC resistance for DISOMAT
Satus:
n Do not conduct the measuring cable shield on the X1.0A plug, but lay it on the
shield rail or housing.
n Do not lay the shield of serial lines on the X1.0B plug, but directly on the hou-
sing/mounting plate (fast-on).
n Connect the fast-on on the back side of the unit by a short path with the hou-
sing (19 rack and mounting plate).
Ground the housing well (we recommend a minimum line cross-section of 4 mm)2
and contact via screwed cable lug (not fast-on).

5.9 Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier


The VXB safety barrier and main VFE subassembly are connected electrically via
multi-strand flat cable with preconnected plugs. It is virtually impossible to plug the
wrong pin in the wrong socket due to the different pole numbers on the plug.
The assignment is:
inputs, 4-pole -> X1.1. B 5-8
analog output, 2-pole -> X1.1. A 1-2
The attached analog doubler from DISOMAT (X1.1 A1-2) has to be attached if
you want the analog output to be used for triggering an analog display in the
explosive zone and for issuing signals in the safe zone (PLC, analog display).
It may never be doubled on the explosive side of the barrier (X41),
feed 3-pole -> X1.1. B 1-3,
double underclamp or use the free connection on the VNT power supply unit.

serial interface -> X0B 6-10


5-pole, small grid
load cell 10-pole -> X0A

The dongle with the memory chip is already mounted with the VXB.

IMPORTANT:
It makes sense to use the old memory chip again when replacing the VXB to keep
the scale parameters.

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 21


Schenck Process
5.9 Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier Connecting the Unit

Fig. 18:

A cover (6) is bolted onto the VXB 209... protective circuits to comply with the air
and conducting paths as per Table 4 of EN 50020. This provides a thread
measure of more than 50 mm between connecting components that are
intrinsically safe and those that are not intrinsically safe.

22 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit 5.10 Connections into the explosive zone

5.10 Connections into the explosive zone

Fig. 19:

You can find the safety instructions and data with an impact on safety on the
VXB209x barriers in the BV-H2330 manual.

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 23


Schenck Process
5.10 Connections into the explosive zone Connecting the Unit

- Reserved for users notes -

24 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.1 Profibus VPB 020 coupler module

6 Bus coupling modules


The VPB 020, VPB 8020, VCB 020 and VCB8020 bus coupling modules are
fastened to the CPU board with 3 screws each (component side upwards). It is
electrically connected up via the ribbon cable. All of the parts needed for
subsequent mounting are attached to the coupling module.

6.1 Profibus VPB 020 coupler module


The module can be attached to the main DISOMAT board to create an interface to
the PROFIBUS-DP. This module is designed and certified as per DIN 19245 or
Part 2 of EN 50170and has an automatic baud rate identification of up to 12
Mbit/s (12 MBaud).

The circuit board has two connections for connecting the bus. You can use both
the XP3 plug (terminals) and the XP1 (HD-9 pole) in the DISOMAT.
Please remember that the first and last unit on the PROFIBUS-DP system has to
have a bus termination . To solve this problem, jump W150, W151 and W152 to
1-2.
Caution: All bridges have to be in the same position.
Pin assignment

XP1 XP3
Pin no. Pin No.
3 1 RxD/TxD-P*
8 2 RxD/TxD-N**
5 3 DGND
6 4 VP
1 5 shield***

* : = -P = B
** : N = A
*** : Please do not put the shield on the plug, but on the cable
clamp

The HI20 LEDs indicate proper bus operation (transmitting and receiving)

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 25


Schenck Process
6.1 Profibus VPB 020 coupler module Bus coupling modules

Fig. 20: Position of connections and jumpers VPB 020

Important!
W100 has to be on position 2-3 to operate with DISOMAT.

Note:
If the last actively terminated slave is removed from the bus, this may cause the
entire bus to malfunction. This fault occurs particularly frequently when using
alternating scales. This problem can be avoided by using a separate active bus
termination as offered by Siemens under order number 6ES7 972-0DA00-0AA0 .
You can also purchase the bus termination from Schenck Process under material
no. V014298.B01.

External wiring
You can find instructions for installing external wiring and protecting against
malfunctions in the Profibus Guideline from the Profibus User Organisation (PNO),
order number 2.111.

You can find other details on the Profibus, in particular on building up the
transmitted data in the DISOMAT Bplus Manual, Opus, Satus, DISOBOX
BVH2316.

Projecting aids (drawings, rules)


The Profibus standard DIN 19245 (part 3) defines a unit master data file and you
can download the suitable Profibus projecting file (.gsd) by Internet from the
Schenck Process product page under www.schenckprocess.com under
products/services and downloads.

26 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.2 Profibus module (VPB8020)

6.2 Profibus module (VPB8020)


As an option, the module can be fastened on the units base card to provide an
interface to the Profibus.

Bus termination
The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station of
the bus. This is done by setting alljumper plugs into position 1-2 on the card. As a
rule the resistances are not activated (position 2-3).

Bus addresses:
n The addresses are set using parameters.

1 2 3 4 5 Operation Mode

Status-LED

6 7 8 9

Front View

Meaning of the LEDs on the Profibus connection


On the Profibus connection (VPB8020), the LED is lit

Opertion Mode

State Indication

Off Not online/No power

Green On-line, Date exchange

Flashing Green On-line, clear

Flashing Red (1 Hz) Parametrization error

Flashing Red (2 Hz) PROFIBUS Configuration error

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 27


Schenck Process
6.2 Profibus module (VPB8020) Bus coupling modules

Status

State Indication

Off Not power or not initialised

Green Initialised

Flashing Green Initialised, diagnostic event(s) present

Red Exceeption error

Pin assignment

Pin Signal (XP1 9-pin Signal (XP3, 5-pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5
Sub-D-female) max. 1.5mm)
1 - B-Line, Positive RS485 RxD/TxD *
2 - A-Line, Negative RS485 RxD/TxD **
3 B-Line, Positive RS485 RxD/TxD GND BUS
*
4 RTS, Request To Send +5V BUS
5 GND BUS Shielding
6 +5V BUS -
7 - -
8 A-Line, Negative RS485 -
RxD/TxD **
9 - -
Housing Bus Cable Shield -

* This cable has the conductor color red.


** This cable has the conductor color green.

Characteristics

Disconnection Optocoupler
Power supply 5V DC internal
Power supply Max 310mA
Plug connector 5-Pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5 max. 1.5mm
9-pin Sub-D-femal

28 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data

6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data


Profibus configurations

Various configurations are available in DISOMAT Satus:


n DISOMAT Satus Standard
32 / 22 bytes per direction
n DISOMAT Satus - Short
10/2 bytes per direction
n DISOMAT Satus Extended
56/60 bytes per direction

Flexible ID mechanism
n Select the coupling card used (VPB020/VPB8020) when configuring the Profi-
bus.
n Select compartibility (DISOMAT T/DISOMAT Satus)

n Select the configuration (see below)

n The following figure shows the valid constellations together with the gsd files to
be used and wherever necessary the CFC modules.
n

Device type DISOMAT T DISOMAT Satus


Software version All <4 4 and larger
Profibus-subassembly VPB 20100 VPB 020 VPB 020 VPB 8020
Compatibility DISOMAT T DISOMAT Satus
Possible configurations Short Short 4 ID, no text Short 0 8 ID,
Standard Standard Standard no text
Extended 4 ID, no text Extended
GSD file DSV4 6712 DSA1 0A97 DSA1 0A97 DSV4 6712 DSA1 0A97
CFC module DISOMAT T, Tplus - - DISOMAT T, Tplus DISCO_P7

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 29


Schenck Process
6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data Bus coupling modules

6.3.1 DISOMAT Satus standard configuration


(Standard Process Image VPB020 and VPB8020,
Mode DISOMAT T)
DP read register (32 bytes)

Object In- Byte Contents


dex
0 0-3 Pending faults
1 4-5 Input contacts 1-4
2 6-9 Output contacts 1-4
3 10-11 Undefined
4 12-15 Net (INT32) [g]
5 16-19 Tare (INT32) [g]
6 20-21 Scale status
7 22-25 Feed rate dg/dt (Float) [kg/s]
8 26-29 Batch actual value (Float) [kg]
9 30-31 Undefined

Pending faults
The number assigned to the fault message of a pending fault.
Refer to the table in the chapter on Event Messages

Input contacts
The date indicates the positions of the bit-coded input contacts.
bit 0 corresponds to contact 1, bit 3 corresponds to contact 4
bit n = 0 : contact low
bit n = 1 : contact high

Output contacts
The outputs are also compiled bit coded in a datum as per the inputs.
bit 0 corresponds to contact 1, bit 3 corresponds to contact 4
bit n = 0 : contact low
bit n = 1 : contact high

Scale status, bit-coded (low byte)


UNDERFLOW bit 0, scale is in the underflow
OVERFLOW bit 1, scale is in the overflow
Tare_CALCULATED bit 2, tare was calculated
PRECISELY_ZERO bit 3, scale is precisely zero
RESOLUTION bit 4, ten times resolution of weight is switched on
INVALID bit 5, weight is invalid
Tare_SET bit 6, scale is tared
NO_MOTION_STATE bit 7, scale is in no-motion state
ADJUSTMENT JUMPER bit 10, jumper in the adjustment position

30 BV-H2331GB / 0731 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data

DP write register (22 bytes)

Object in- Byte Contents


dex
0 0-1 Unused
1 2-3 Scale commands
2 4-5 Undefined
3 6-7 Set data processing contacts
4 8-9 Data processing contacts
5 10 - 11 Unused
6 12 - 13 Unused
7 14 - 17 Unused
8 18 - 21 Unused

Scale commands
bit 1 : Clear tare
bit 0 : Tare
bit 2 : Zero setting

This action is triggered when the bit affected was 0 at least 200 msec and then
changed to 1.

set data processing contacts and data processing contacts

There are 4 data processing contacts


Bit 0 corresponds to contact 1 and bit 3 corresponds to contact 4
If a bit is 1 in the Set Data Processing Contacts space, the contact is set as per
the value in the Data Processing Contacts space.

Example:
Data processing contacts: 0x0a = 00001010

Set data processing contacts: 0x09 = 00001001

Contact 1 is set to LOW and contact 4 is set to HIGH. 1 in bit 1 of the Data
Processing Contacts space does not have any meaning.

In DISOMAT Satus, the physical output contacts are set if they were configured
to From Data Processing in the configuration.

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 31


Schenck Process
6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data Bus coupling modules

6.3.2 Configuration DISOMAT Satus-Short (Configuration


Short Process Image,VPB020 and VPB8020, Mode
DISOMAT T)
DP read register (10 bytes)

Object index byte Content


0 0-3 Gross weight in kg
(IEEE float)
1 4-7 Tare in kg (IEEE
float)
2 8-9 Scale status

Scale status, bit-coded (low byte)


UNDERFLOW bit 0, the scale is in the underflow
OVERFLOW bit 1, the scale is in the overflow
Tare_CALCULATED bit 2, tare was calculated
PRECISELY_ZERO bit 3, the scale is precisely zero
RESOLUTION bit 4, ten times the resolution if the weight is switched on
INVALID bit 5, the weight is invalid
Tare_SET bit 6, the scale is tared
NO-MOTION STATE bit 7, the scale is in no-motion state
DP write register (2 bytes)

Object index Byte Content


1 0-1 Scale commands

Scale commands
Bit 1 : Clear tare
Bit 0 : Tare
Bit 2 : zero setting
This action is triggered when the bit affected was 0 at least 200 msec and then
changed to 1.

32 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data

6.3.3 Konfiguration Satus-Extended (only VPB8020, Mode


DISOMAT T)
DP read register (32 bytes)

Object index byte Contents Alternative reading data


0 0-3 Pending faults
1 4-5 Entry contacts 1 - 4
2 6-9 Output contacts 1 - 4
3 10 - 11 Batch number
4 12 - 15 Net (INT32) [g]
5 16 - 19 Tare (INT32) [g]
6 20 - 21 Scale status
7 22 - 25 Feed rate dg/dt (float) [kg/s]
8 26 - 29 Actual batch value (float) [kg] Pre-contact (float)
9 30 - 33 Residual Amount of batch (float) [kg] Adaptation Factor (float)
10 34 - 37 Current setpoint/last batch (float) [kg] Controller magnitude full-feed (float)
11 38 - 41 Setpoint for next batch (float) [kg] Control magnitude for dribble feed
(float)
12 42 - 45 Level gross (float) [kg] Time for dribble speed of ramp (float)
13 46 - 49 Batch sum (balance sheet) (float)
14 50 - 53 Correction Amount (main contact) (float) [kg] Neg. tolerance (float)
15 54 - 55 Batching status

Alternative reading data


The alternative content of bytes 26-53 can be adjusted via bit 15 of the accept
command and it is the readback tool for the component parameters set.
Batching status
Bit 0 : feed unit ON
Bit 1 : batch active
Bit 2 : full feed
Bit 3 : dribble feed
Bit 4 : filling active
Bit 5 : discharging active
Bit 6 : open flap (for discharging or filling; identical with digital
output for flap OPEN)
Bit 7 : LOW / GIW type
Bit 8 : material quantity (Note: initiate discharging or filling)
Bit 9 : batching time > Max.
Bit 10 : time the flap is open> Max.
Bit 11 : except pos. tolerance
Bit 12 : except neg. tolerance
Bit 13 : spare
Bit 14 : spare

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 33


Schenck Process
6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data Bus coupling modules

DP writing index (60 bytes)

Object index byte Contents


0 0-1 Unused
1 2-3 Scale commands
2 4-5 Accept commands
3 6-7 Set data processing contacts
4 8-9 Data processing contacts
5 10 - 11 Command
6 12 - 13 Value 1 (INT16)
7 14 - 17 Value 2 (INT 32)
8 18 - 21 Value 3 (INT 32)
9 22 - 25 Batch setpoint (float) [kg]
10 26 - 29 Pre-contact (float) [kg]
11 30 - 33 Correction Amount (float) [kg]
12 34 - 37 Adaptation factor (float) [kg]
13 38 - 41 Controller Magnitude for full feed (float) [mA]
14 42 - 45 Controller Magnitude for dribble feed (float) [mA]
15 46 - 49 Time of dribble feed ramp (float) [s]
16 50 - 53 Pos. tolerance (float) [kg]
17 54 - 57 Neg. tolerance (float) [kg]
18 58 - 59 Batching commands

The dosage can be guided via charging commands in addition to the scale
commands of bytes 2/3 already described. This action is triggered when the bit
affected was 0 at least 200 msec and then changed to 1.
Charging commands
Bit 0: start
Bit 1: stop
Bit 2: cancel
Bit 3: clear batching total
Bit 4: start filling
Bit 5: stop filling
Bit 6: start discharging
Bit 7: stop discharging

Accept commands (bits 0-8 only go into effect when changing from 0 to 1)
Bit 0: accept pre-contact
Bit 1: accept correction amount
Bit 2: accept adaptation value
Bit 3: accept controller magnitude for full feed
Bit 4: accept controller magnitude for dribble feed
Bit 5: accept time for dribble feed ramp
Bit 6: pos. Accept tolerance value
bit 7: neg. Accept tolerance value
Bit 8: accept setpoint
Bit 9 - 14: spare
Bit 15: request component parameters (refer to read-only data) statically
Note: Values marked (float) are floating point numbers in the IEEE 7544 byte
format

34 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data

MSB LSB

Vorz/Exponent Mantissa 1 Mantissa 2 Mantissa 3

The transmission begins at the same time as the MSB.


For example:
Specifications for the master -> slave
byte 0 1 00 00
byte 2 3 00 00
byte 4 5 01 00 accept setpoint
byte 6 - 21 00 - 00
byte 22 25 41 20 00 00 setpoint: 10 kg
byte 26 29 3e 4c cc cd pre-contact: 0,2 kg
byte 30 - 33 3d 4c cc cd correction amount 0,05 kg
byte 34 - 37 3f 00 00 00 adaptation value 0,5
byte 38 - 59 00 - 00

Note:
Changing byte 4-5 of 00 00 > 01 00:
DISOMAT only accepts the batch setpoint.
Changing byte 4-5 of 00 00 > 01 07:
DISOMAT accepts the setpoint and also the pre-contact, correction amount and
adaptation value.

Process image slave -> master


byte 03 00 00 00 00
byte 45 00 00
byte 69 00 00 00 00
byte 10 11 00 27 batch number 39
byte 12 15 00 00 1f 66 net (int)
byte 16 19 00 00 00 00 tare (int)
byte 20 21 00 80 wagon status: scale is in the no-motion
state
byte 22 25 b9 ca d6 19 dG/ dt: ca. 0.000
byte 26 29 40 9f 8e 25 actual batch value: 4,986 kg
byte 30 33 3c 63 b4 00 residual batch quantity: 0,014 kg
byte 34 37 40 9f ff ff current setpoint/last batch: 5 kg
byte 38 41 41 20 00 00 setpoint for next batch: 10 kg
byte 42 45 41 00 b5 17 level: 8,044 kg
byte 46 49 43 6e c9 78 batching total: 238,787 kg
byte 50 53 3d 30 56 4d correction amount: 0,043 kg
byte 54 55 00 00 00 00 batching status

6.3.4 Flexible ID Mechanism


(VPB020 and VPB8020 + DISOMAT Satus)
Refer to the BV-H2359 Manual for details

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 35


Schenck Process
6.5 VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module Bus coupling modules

6.4 Fieldbus monitoring (Profibus-DP)


Since output contacts can be set via fieldbus interface and drives of feed units can
be triggered , a communication failure has to be identified and the corresponding
outputs have to be changed into the safe state. Monitoring is active when the set
timeout > 0 and a fieldbus card is connected.

If the connection to a fieldbus master fails, current batching is stopped after


timeout and a fault message is issued. The fault message is automatically cleared
after resuming the connection.

6.5 VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module


This module can be attached to DISOMATs to interface it to the DeviceNet.

The VCB 020 card has two bus connecting plugs. Both XC1 and XC3 plugs can be
used in DISOMAT.

Pin no..
1 0V
2 CAN-
3 Shield (please lay on the cable inlet and not on the XC plug)
4 CAN+
5 +24V

The bus address is set via software.


Put jumper W160 onto 1-2.
W100 has to be on position 2-3 to operate with DISOMAT.
You can find more details on the Devicenet, in particular on the structure of
transmitted data, in the Data Communication BV-H2359 manual.

36 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.5 VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module

Fig. 21: Position of connectors and jumpers VCB 020

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 37


Schenck Process
6.6 DeviceNet module (VCB8020) Bus coupling modules

6.6 DeviceNet module (VCB8020)


As an option, the module can be fastened on the units mainboard to provide an
interface to the CAN-Bus with DeviceNet procedure.

1
XP3 VCB8020
W160 H120
XP1 5 4 3 2 1

1
2
Feldbuskarten-
Verbinder
3
4
5 H110 W100
DC/DC 1
vh233407.cdr

Bus termination
n The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station of
the bus. This is done by applying the W160 jumper to the position 1-2. By de-
fault, the resistances arenot activated (position 2-3).

Baud rate and bus addresses:


n Both values are set using parameters.

The W100 jumper, for determining the power supply, must be plugged in position
2-3.

XP1
Network Status LED
1 2 3 4 5
Module Status LED

Front View

38 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.6 DeviceNet module (VCB8020)

Network Status (LED)

Status Indication

Off Not online/ No power

Green On-line, one or more connections are established

Flashing Green (1Hz) Onl-ine, no connaections established

red Critical link failure

Flashing Red (1 Hz) One of more connection timed-out

Alternating Red/Green Self test

Moduel Status LED

Status Indication

OFF No power

Green Operating in normal condition

Flashing Green (1Hz) Missing or incomplete configutation, device needs


commissioning

Red Unreccoverable Faultst(s)

Flashing Red (1 Hz) Recoverable (Fault(s)

Alternating Red/Greed Self test

Plug assignment X20/XC3

Pin Signal X20


3 Screening
4 CAN_H
2 CAN_L
1 V-
5 V+

Characteristics

Disconnection Optocoupler
Power supply 5V DC internal
Power supply Max 250mA
Plug connector Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 2.5mm
Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 1.5mm

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 39


Schenck Process
6.6 DeviceNet module (VCB8020) Bus coupling modules

- Reserved for users notes -

40 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Analog display

7 Analog display
An optional simple display can be connected to DISOMAT Satus that is triggered
by the analog interface (4 20 mA). Although the display is entirely fed from the
interfaces current, its load is so low that an analog PLC input can be fed without
any problems (maximum external load: 250 ).

The display has 3 1/2 digits


n The digits are 10 mm high
n It can be set with the DIP switch and potentiometer
n It can be combined with the 19" rack.

Connection and Configuration

Fig. 22:

The standard preset display shows triggering 0-1,000 at 420 mA. The display is
completely readjusted in the order described below.
1. Turn the zero point R3 potentiometer and the R7 zone potentiometer to the
right all the way to the catch.
Set the SW4 SW6 switches to OFF
2. The SW1 switch to ON (the end of the zone can be set between 650-1,350)
3. Trigger with 4 mA and set the display to 000 with the R3 potentiometer.
4. Trigger with 20 mA and set the display to 1000 with the R7 potentiometer.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as a check.
6. Set the desired decimal point with the SW4 SW6 switches.
SW6 ON 1 place behind the decimal point
SW5 ON 2 places behind the decimal point
SW4 ON 3 places behind the decimal point
You can preset the display ranges with the SW1-SW3 switches.

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 41


Schenck Process
Analog display

SW1 SW2 SW3 4mA 20mA


OFF OFF OFF 000 to 1050 - 1999
ON OFF OFF 000 to 650 - 1350
OFF ON OFF 000 to 450 - 800
OFF OFF ON 000 to 300 - 500
ON ON ON 000 to 200 - 300

Note:
You can easily specify 4 mA or 20 mA by issuing the setpoint via analog output.
Set P12 of the scale control parameters to 4 (refer to Chapter 6.5.7) and use
Disoplan or the TCLI command ES to select the setpoint.

42 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN

8 Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN


The DISOPLAN PC program is available for conveniently configuring and
parametering the DISOMAT family scales

The instruments that can be interfaced now are:


DISOMAT Opus
DISOMAT Satus
DISOBOX
DISOMAT Tersus

Acceptable operating systems are:


n WINDOWS XP
n WINDOWS 2000

n WINDOWS Vista

You can do the following with DISOPLAN:


n Assign subscriber addresses to the serial bus

n Configure interfaced instruments


n Displaying the scale weights and operating the scale

n Display group and channel weights and their status (only with DISOBOX )

n Edit the language files and load into DISOMAT


n Read out the entire system configuration (back-up) and store in the PC

n Load stored data into a DISOMAT (restore) for fast substitute system set-up.

NOTE:
Access to the DISOPLAN functions is administered via license levels. They range
from the standard operator to the instrument developer. This is the reason why
some of the functions shown in this manual may not be visible or accessible in
other installations.

DISOPLAN installation is self-explanatory.

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0731 43


Schenck Process
Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN

IMPORTANT NOTE:
There are some unit parameters that cannot be set via DISOPLAN menu item
in the DISOMAT-Satus firmware version combination: VWW20900-04 with
DISOPLAN version 5.
Please use the Control Terminal function to configure these items. Follow the-
se steps:
Start the control terminal
main menu/display/control terminal)
Navigate with the arrow keys to menu item 41
(down/right/right/down).
Start password input (ENTER)
Password 618349 (ENTER)
Navigate with the arrow keys to the menu items.

This affects the items:


Calibration analog output menu item 435
Fieldbus 4334
Option management/release Ethernet-IP) 5d

Data acquisition (OK) is located in the control terminal on the END button.t.

Please leave the menu tree by repeatedly pressing the Arrow Up button before
you close the control terminal.

44 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN 8.1 Serial connection

8.1 Serial connection


You can connect these system with the following interfaces

DISOMAT Tersus S3 9-pole HD-plug


(use a null modem cable)
DISOMAT Satus S1

DISOMAT Opus S1 Use the V052410.B01 cable or make cables according to the connection
diagram in the system manual.
DISOBOX S1

Matching cables are included in DISOPLAN-CD.

You can connect DISOPLAN at any time if the interface is not occupied by other
systems. You have to turn the system on and off if the interface is otherwise
occupied (for instance, with a secondary display) and you can start set-up
operation with DISOPLAN within the first minute after turning it on. Turn
DISOPLAN on and off after ending it and its resumes normal operation after one
minute.

You can activate set-up operation in menu item 5C Start DISOPLAN at any time if
the system has a display and keyboard.

All systems can also be configured via Ethernet (the VET 020 option card has to
be installed on DISOBOX). This allows access to the system at any time, but the
configuration of the PC used has to allow access to the systems network address.

The following figure shows the start screen of DISOPLAN:

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 45


Schenck Process
8.1 Serial connection Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN

Connected systems are identified by the Search for New Systems function and the
following series of figures shows how to communicate via Ethernet (there is a
different process with serial communication).

The figure below shows an example of how DISOMAT Opus is found.

Other detected device types are displayed in the window with different symbols.
To configure a system, either click the symbol twice or branch off to the specific
system via Display Selection.

46 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus


Schenck Process
Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN 8.2 DISOMAT Opus / Satus / Tersus

8.2 DISOMAT Opus / Satus / Tersus


If you start configuring DISOMAT from the DISOPLAN start screen, you come to
the following overview field where you can call up the most important functions
directly:

Before starting configuration, you have to use the Enter Password function to set
the correct operating privilege. You can find details on the structure of privileges in
each operating manual.

IMPORTANT:
The current passwords in the system are used (they may differ from the factory
values given in the manual).

This does not apply to DISOMAT Satus.

DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 47


Schenck Process
8.3 Parametrization and calibration Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN

8.3 Parametrization and calibration


You can use the settings symbol to get to instrument configuration.
You can set some important system parameters directly in the window shown in
the following figure.

They are:
Function variant
- see below
Link function blocks (only DISOMAT Tersus)
- refer to the BVH2317 Manual
Fieldbus communication
IP configuration
Create a printing pattern
Specific national settings
- see below
Edit language
- see below

You can use the Parameter function to arrive at setting all system parameters.

When you load the data, it shows the internal menu tree of DISOMAT as shown.
It offers all instrument parameters and functions in a transparent fashion for editing
and executing. Since all of the functions have been explained in the BV-H2313
Operating Manual, we sha